JP2017205463A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving taste by preventing a change of display modes of a specific display from getting monotonous.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: reservation display means capable of displaying a reservation display corresponding to a variable display that is not started yet; specific display means, when starting the variable display, capable of displaying a specific display corresponding the variable display; display means including a prescribed area for displaying the specific display; and a state change display means capable of displaying a state change display that can change in a stepwise manner. The game machine can execute, as a performance to be executed on the prescribed area, a prescribed performance that includes a first specific display mode of changing the specific display on the basis of prescribed information, and a second specific display mode not changing the specific display; can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes with different expectation degrees; and changes any display mode out of the plurality of types of display modes according to a display stage of the state change display to display the specific display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so called slot machine).

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who easily wins a ball or an advantageous state for a player. It is to generate a right and to be in a state where conditions for paying out a prize ball are easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 describes that a specific display corresponding to a variable display is displayed, and the degree of expectation is notified by changing a display mode of the specific display.

JP 2011-171 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the change in the display mode of the specific display is monotonous, the interest cannot be sufficiently improved.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a change in display mode of a specific display from becoming monotonous and can improve interest.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol) and is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). A controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901),
On-hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet started (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of S813 and displays the hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a, step CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the processing of S90532 and displaying the hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H),
When starting the variable display, the specific display means (for example, the process of S813) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, active display or hold display) corresponding to the variable display is executed, and the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. The effect control microcomputer 100 to be displayed, the effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90532 and displaying the active display in the active display area 905HA,
Display means (for example, effect display device 9, image display device 905) including display means including a predetermined area (for example, active display area 9F, active display area 905HB, etc.) for displaying the specific display;
State change display means (for example, meter display area 90) capable of displaying a state change display (for example, meter display) that can be changed stepwise;
With
As an effect (for example, active change effect) executed in the predetermined area, a first specific display mode (for example, the color of the active display is changed) that changes the specific display based on predetermined information (for example, a displayed character). And a second specific display mode that does not change the specific display (for example, a mode in which the color of the active display does not change) can be performed,
The specific display can be displayed by a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations.
Depending on the display stage of the state change display, the specific display can be displayed by changing to any one of a plurality of types of display modes (for example, first to third modes) (for example, production) The part in which the control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8108 and S8109 (refer to the meter display / active display correspondence table shown in FIG. 42B).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the change in the display mode of the specific display from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 2) In the means 1, notification effect execution means (for example, the portion in which the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8106 and S8107) that executes the notification effect when the display stage of the state change display is changed. It may be configured to include.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the state change display.

(Means 3) Even if the specific display is displayed in the same display mode in the means 1 or 2, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the display stage of the state change display. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, even if the display mode of the active display is the same first mode, the meter display is in the second stage rather than the first stage. Expectation is high).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the change of the display stage of the state change display even after the display mode of the specific display is changed.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the gaming machine is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and executes a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) during execution of variable display. Possible specific effect means (for example, the part where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8011, S8105) and the suggestion effect (for example, battle command effect) suggesting that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state The specific display means is capable of displaying a corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the specific display. A suggestion effect can be executed by any one of the types of effect modes (for example, a display at the time of battle command is displayed in blue, green, or red) 50), the selection ratio of the effect mode of the suggestion effect varies depending on whether or not the corresponding display is displayed in the specific display mode during execution of the specific effect (active display shown in FIG. 50). May be configured so that the display color at the time of the battle command is “red” when the image is displayed in the third mode (red).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the corresponding display with the presentation mode of the suggestion effect.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, special effect execution means (for example, effect control micro) capable of executing a special effect (for example, meter display change effect) for changing the display stage of the state change display. The computer 100 includes steps for executing steps S8011, S8105.), And the special effect execution means is special in any one of the effect modes (for example, the first effect mode to the third effect mode). The rate at which the display stage of the state change display changes varies depending on which effect mode is used to execute the effect (the meter display changes shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E) (Refer to the production mode determination table).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the effect aspect of the special effect and improve the interest.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the state change display means displays the state change display in a specific form (for example, special display) when the state change display changes to a specific stage (for example, the fifth stage). ) And may be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the state change display has changed to a specific stage.

(Means 7) In the means 6, the state change display means can display the state change display by a plurality of types of specific modes (for example, the special display of the first to third special display modes), A specific mode (for example, a special display of the third special display mode) for notifying that it is determined that the control is in the advantageous state may be included.
According to such a configuration, in addition to the state change display changing to a specific aspect, attention can be paid to which one of a plurality of types of specific aspects changes, and interest can be improved.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 8-means 16 shown below. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls Some game media are paid out to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information such as special symbols (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins a predetermined winning area (starting winning occurs) is provided. Some of the information is displayed in a variable display state, and when the result is a special game result (for example, a jackpot symbol), the player is controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, controlled to a jackpot game state). . In such a gaming machine, there is one having a region for displaying a specific display (active display) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information when the variable display of the identification information is started (for example, JP, 2014-87492, A). However, in this gaming machine, there is not enough gaming entertainment for the display mode of the specific display, and it is required to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming entertainment.

(Means 8) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display of identification information (for example, variable display of special symbols) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 that executes the process of step S90532 and displays the hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H). When,
When the variable display of the identification information is started, specific display means (for example, the process of step S90532 is executed to display a specific display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the active display area Effect control CPU 90120 for displaying an active display on 905HA,
Display means (eg, image display device 905) including a predetermined area (eg, active display area 905HB) for displaying the specific display;
With
As an effect (for example, active change effect) executed in the predetermined area, a first specific display mode (for example, the color of the active display is changed) that changes the specific display based on predetermined information (for example, a displayed character). And a second specific display mode that does not change the specific display (for example, a mode in which the color of the active display does not change).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(Means 9) In the gaming machine of the means 8,
The predetermined area may be a background display different from other areas in the display means (for example, the background display of the active display area 905HB is different from the background display of areas other than the active display area 905HB). about).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the predetermined area, and the gaming interest is improved.

(Means 10) In the gaming machine of the above means 8 or 9,
The specific display may be more conspicuous than the hold display (for example, the active display is larger than the hold display).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display, and the gaming interest is improved.

(Means 11) In the gaming machine of any one of the means 8 to 11,
The specific display can be erased during execution of the predetermined effect in the predetermined area, and the specific display may be displayed in relation to the execution mode of the predetermined effect (for example, execution of the active first effect) In this case, the active display is once deleted and the character is displayed, and then the character is deleted and the active display is displayed).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the predetermined effect, and the gaming interest is improved.

(Means 12) In the gaming machine of any one of the means 8 to 11,
There are a plurality of execution modes of the predetermined effect (for example, an active first effect mode based on the active first effect patterns A, B, and C), and the predetermined effect is the first specified according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect. You may make it the ratio used as a display mode differ (for example, the ratio in which the color of an active display changes in an active 1st production in order of active 1st production pattern A, B, C is high).
According to such a structure, the aspect of a predetermined production becomes various and a game entertainment interest improves.

(Means 13) In the gaming machine of any one of the means 8 to 12,
As the predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, an active first effect based on active first effect patterns A, B, and C) that suggests whether or not to change the specific display, and the first predetermined effect are: Unlikely, a second predetermined effect (for example, an active second effect based on the active second effect patterns D, E, and F) suggesting that the variable display of the identification information may be advantageous without changing the specific display. May be executed.
According to such a structure, the aspect of a predetermined production becomes various and a game entertainment interest improves.

(Means 14) In the gaming machine of any one of the means 8 to 13,
As a predetermined effect of the first specific display mode for changing the specific display, the first predetermined effect and a third predetermined effect (for example, an out-of-region effect) for changing the specific display from outside the predetermined area, The rate at which the specific display changes may be different (for example, the rate at which the active display changes in the active first effect based on the active first effect patterns A, B, and C changes in the active display in the out-of-region effect). Higher than percentage).
According to such a configuration, the game interest is improved by making the player pay attention to which effect is executed.

(Means 15) In the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to 14,
The predetermined effect and an effect (for example, a serif effect) outside the predetermined area may be executed in parallel.
According to such a structure, the aspect of a production becomes various and a game entertainment interest improves.

(Means 16) In the gaming machine of any one of the means 8 to 15,
Depending on the specific display mode, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect may be different (for example, when the color of the active display changes to red, the active first is more active than when the color changes to another color). The execution ratio of the active first effect based on the effect patterns A, B, and C is high).
According to such a configuration, the game interest is improved by making the player pay attention to which predetermined effect is executed.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a meter display final display mode determination table, a meter display / active display correspondence table, and a special display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a meter display change effect aspect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a meter display change effect timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a meter display change effect and an active display change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a meter display change effect and an active display change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the display color determination table at the time of a battle command. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in other embodiments. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating random value MR1'-MR3 '. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order and the fluctuation pattern in the case of holding 1 and holding 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order in the case of the holding | maintenance 3, and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order and the fluctuation pattern in the case of the holding | maintenance 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of holding information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the active 1st production pattern determination ratio with a color change (at the time of success). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution presence or absence ratio of the active 1st production without a color change (at the time of failure). It is a figure which shows an example of the active 1st production pattern determination ratio without a color change (at the time of failure). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution presence or absence ratio of an active 2nd effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the active 2nd production pattern determination ratio. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of active 1st production and execution of speech production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of active 2nd production execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of out-of-area production execution.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the outlier) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d is assimilated with the background image when the display is turned off. In order to prevent the image from becoming invisible, it is desirable that the display color be different from the background image (for example, black).

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 14 is such that the nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting prize opening 13 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting prize opening 13. This may be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first hold memory display unit 9a for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold memory display unit 9b for displaying the second hold memory number. ing. The first hold storage display unit 9a displays a first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. The second hold storage display unit 9b displays a second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold storage. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a sum hold storage display part displays the 1st reservation memory and the 2nd reservation memory side by side in order of winning a prize to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14 So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  In addition, an active display in which a specific display corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed between the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. A region 9F is provided. In this embodiment, in the active display area 9F, display in the same manner as the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b is performed as the specific display. Hereinafter, a display in the same manner as the hold display displayed in the active display area 9F is also referred to as an active display. In addition, as long as it can be recognized that the display corresponds to the currently displayed variable display, the display need not be the same as the hold display, and other figures, characters, and the like may be displayed. .

  In this embodiment, the “specific display corresponding to the variable display” is displayed on the active display displayed in the active display area 9F, and on the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b. Corresponds to the hold display. The specific display is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and may be a display that includes at least a hold display and that corresponds to the variable display in some form. In this embodiment, the active display area 9F is configured to display active display. However, it is not always necessary to perform active display, and the active display area 9F may not be provided.

  In addition, a meter display area 90 is provided above the active display area 9 </ b> F at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The meter display area 90 displays a meter display in which the meter value changes due to a meter display change effect described later. In this embodiment, the meter display displays the meter value in the first to fifth display modes in addition to the display mode in which the meter value is not displayed.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 78 may be operated in a pseudo-series effect, for example, not limited to the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is higher (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of displaying a special symbol is higher than that in the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (ie, a special symbol). The display shifts to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 53 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 53 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 53 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 53 to update the random R value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is won, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured so that all types of jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, it is not necessary to provide a jackpot. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you are configured to provide a small hit, suddenly probable big hits that do not involve a short-time state (high base state) just by shifting to a probable state (high probability state). Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used in the case where the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream or slip effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but involves a pseudo-ream or slip effect. Includes non-reach CA2-2, which is a variation pattern type including, non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slip production, and a variation pattern that includes only normal reach Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type that includes, and a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probable variation big hit, or a sudden probable big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be suddenly probable big hit), whereas the jackpot type determination table 131b is assigned two judgment values for “sudden probable big hit” (a ratio of 2/40) Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, a sudden probability variation big hit (two round big hit) as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given, and the game There are cases where it is determined as a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that gives a game value larger than the value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a time-short state (high base state) after the big hit gaming state ends (see steps S167 and 168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends when the variable display is ended 100 times (see steps S168 and S137 to 140 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the end of the execution of 100 fluctuation displays, the time reduction state ends (see step S132 described later).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the jackpot is changed to the probable change state) The state is also shifted to the short time state (high base state) (see steps S169 and S170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability variation state and the time-short state (high base state). (See steps S169 and S170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the normal big hit or the big hit state with the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the game state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state and the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> C are used for the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more are shown. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is used in which the variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation / shortening time is used regardless of the total number of stored storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. The “expected degree (reliability)” for the jackpot indicates the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and sliding effects, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns that do not involve the pseudo ream and the slide effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes the pseudo ream and the slide effect. Special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “probable big hit”. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time reduction state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following types of reserved memory Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is specified is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won as the hold storage information (whether the first hold storage or the second hold storage has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. In addition, a value for specifying a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, a short time state, or out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). Send a variable category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, even if it becomes a non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3 variation pattern type, a display change effect described later may be executed only for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Good. In the case of such a configuration, only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, and super CA3-3 are included, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, (Variable category 1 command, variable category 8 command, variable category 23 command, variable category 26 command only), and the variable category command is not transmitted in the case of a determination result at the time of winning of other variation pattern types. May be. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that the hold notice effect is a kind of so-called prefetch notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the subject of the notice effect, and the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit. This is a notice effect performed by displaying the hold display in 9b in a display mode different from the normal display mode. The hold notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the appearance effect or the hold display is displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be noticed. Based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be notified, the display of the hold display is temporarily started in the normal display mode at the timing when the appearance effect or the hold display is displayed, and then a predetermined timing (for example, On hold shift timing), the hold notice effect may be executed by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal display mode.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the short time state (high base state), or when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is made during the big hit game. Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), a winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted, and the fluctuations shown in FIGS. A category command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time-short flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-short state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize presentation effect process is executed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are preliminarily determined at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set as a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H)”) as EXT data. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing in steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start winning prize is received in the second start winning opening 14 and the winning time effect processing in step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be performed. That is, only when it is in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 8A. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A display change effect is performed in which a big hit or a super reach is announced in advance during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probability variation state.) For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability variation flag or a time reduction flag is set). Determine. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning, until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the state is the short time state and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, since the range of determination values is shared with respect to at least the variation pattern type that becomes “super-reaching”, it is determined whether or not “super-reaching” is detected. be able to.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the symbol designating command for EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit”. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. If there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “sudden probability change big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “ordinary big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . Then, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not show which variation pattern type is specifically shown, but the variation shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A display change effect, which will be described later, may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is determined in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed and not compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, in step S220) Only the processing may be executed, and the processing in steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probability change state (normal state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is set when shifting to the short-time state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, and the short-time state is also set at the end of the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit. Because of this, the hour / short flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined as Y in step S95, the control is performed in the time-saving state together with the probability change state after the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit in addition to the case where the control is only in the time-saving state after the big hit game based on the normal big hit game. There are times when it has been.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state, a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of a shortened change may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (see FIG. 10). 10 (B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to configure so as to perform a hold notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 sends one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither “normal big hit” nor “probability big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (Step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122, which will be described later, for example. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is “probable big hit”, a jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-payment opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (command A003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is “ordinary big hit”, a big hit end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “probable big hit”, a big hit end 2 designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. ) Is transmitted, and in the case of “sudden probability sudden change big hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. This can be determined by checking. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is not finished (that is, if the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is finished), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag to change the gaming state to the probability changed state. In addition to the transition (step S169), the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  In this embodiment, since the above processing is executed, when it is controlled to the probability variation state, it is also controlled to the time reduction state, so that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state) ), Short-time state (low probability / high base state), and probability variation state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when a jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag is set. When a jackpot end 2 designation command is received, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) (step S627), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end command reception flag. (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S651). S652).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S653). S654).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 has the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. Then, the first start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in a free first storage area (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 has the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. Then, the second start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in a free first storage area (step S660).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. Among these, FIG. 36A shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 36B shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 36A, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the first start winning command storage area. Yes. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. 20, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is shown. When there is a start winning at the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number) within one timer interruption Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize command storage area and the second start prize command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 performs symbol designation in the command analysis processing. When a command and a variable category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variable category command storage area, respectively. When the pending storage number addition designation command is received, if the first pending storage number addition designation command is received, it is understood that the first pending storage number is incremented by one. If the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the first stored memory number addition designation command is received together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and the variable category command. When the first reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning command storage area and the second reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the second reserved memory is stored together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the second start prize command storage area (in FIG. 36, the first start prize command is stored). An example is shown in which commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the pay area, and commands are stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Have been).

  Note that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is sequentially displayed in steps S664 and S668, which will be described later, at the timing when the variation display of the effect symbol is started each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36B are deleted. . Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, and therefore, the first time shown in FIG. The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first starting winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 36 (A), when the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is deleted. The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designation command, which is a command indicating whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning presentation process (see FIG. 22) at the time of starting winning, a determination result of the big hit type, a determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S662). Next, the production control CPU 101 erases one first on-hold display in the first on-hold storage display unit 9a, shifts the remaining first on-hold display after the erased first on-hold storage one by one, The first reserved memory number display in the one reserved memory display unit 9a is updated (step S663). For example, when the 1st to 3rd 1st hold display of the 1st hold memory display part 9a is lit-up display, when the 1st hold memory number subtraction designation command is received, the 1st 1st hold display While erasing the first hold display, the first hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed in the third is displayed in the second display area. Shift to.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 uses a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command and first reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area. ) Is deleted, and the contents of the first start winning prize command storage area are shifted (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S665), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S666). Next, the production control CPU 101 erases one second on-hold display in the second on-hold storage display unit 9b, shifts the remaining second on-hold display after the erased second on-hold storage one by one, The second reserved memory number display in the two reserved memory display unit 9b is updated (step S667). For example, when the first to third second hold indications of the second hold storage display portion 9b are lit and displayed, when the second hold memory number subtraction designation command is received, the first second hold indication is displayed. While erasing the second hold display, the second hold display that was displayed second is shifted to the first display area, and the second hold display that was displayed third is the second display area Shift to.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 uses a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command and second reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area. ) Is deleted, and the contents of the second start winning command storage area are shifted (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 uses a background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the normal state) is displayed by displaying the background screen corresponding to the normal state. (Also referred to as a normal performance mode). Next, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the time reduction state flag indicating the time reduction state (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the short time state) is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short time state. (Also referred to as a time reduction effect mode). Next, the output control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S674).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S675), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, a red diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S676). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the probability variation state) is displayed by displaying a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state. (Also referred to as a probability variation effect mode). Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S677).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S678). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for performing display control of the hold display (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process (step S800A). In the hold display control process, the production control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress (step S6000). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed is, for example, that the effect symbol variation display is not being performed (for example, the value of the variation time timer set in the effect symbol variation start process is 0), and the first hold By confirming that neither the memory nor the second reserved memory is present (for example, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number updated in steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 are 0). Can be judged. If the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the hold display control process is terminated. In other words, even if a new start win occurs during the customer waiting demonstration display, since the variable display is started immediately and there is almost no time for displaying the hold display, the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed. The process is terminated as it is (without displaying the hold display).

  Note that even when the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, there is neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory, and the remaining time of the variable display being executed is very short and immediately before the end of the variable display (for example, the remaining Even if it is within 1 second), even if a new start win occurs, there is substantially no time for displaying the hold display, so the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed (hold) You may make it complete | finish a process as it is, without displaying a display.

  Also, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display is not started immediately after stopping the variation display of the production symbol, but the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last variation display was finished. If it is configured to start, since it is a period during which the display is not held and the variable display is not executed even during the predetermined period, it is determined as Y in step S6000, and the process is ended as it is. Also good.

  When the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed and it is determined as Y in step S6000 and the hold display control process is terminated, a hold memory number addition designation command (first hold memory number addition designation command, second hold memory number addition designation). Command) is not incremented even if a command is received, a subsequent subtraction designation command (first subtraction memory number subtraction designation command, second subtraction memory number subtraction designation command) is received. Control is performed so as not to delete the hold display without executing the processing of steps S663 and S667 of the command analysis processing. In this case, for example, if it is determined in step S655 or S658 of the command analysis process that it is determined that a new pending storage number addition designation command has been received, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed is confirmed. If a waiting demonstration is being displayed, a flag indicating that is set, and when a pending storage count subtraction designation command is received (see Y in steps S661 and S665), if the flag is set, step S663 is set. , S667 should not be executed. In this case, not only the process of increasing / decreasing the hold display but also the processes of steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 are skipped, and the process of increasing / decreasing the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number itself. May also be omitted.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, the process of step S6000 is omitted, and even after the customer waiting demonstration is displayed, the process after step S6001 is executed and a new start prize is generated. A hold display may be displayed. In this case, if the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration is terminated, and a new hold display is temporarily displayed by the processing in step S6001 and subsequent steps.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a new start winning has occurred and a new start winning command has been received (step S6001). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a new start prize has occurred. Specifically, if a new first reserved storage addition designation command or second reserved storage addition designation command is stored in the first startup prize command storage area or the second startup prize command storage area shown in FIG. Thus, it can be determined that a new start prize has occurred.

  If a new start winning command has been received (Y in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 displays a hold display corresponding to the variable display based on the new start winning (step S6002). In step S6002, when the first hold storage addition designation command is received, the first hold display is newly displayed, and when the second hold storage addition designation command is received, it is newly displayed. A second hold display is displayed.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are the same even symbols as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit is made, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the odd number symbols aligned, so that the odd number symbol is likely to become the probability variation big hit. Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the even symbols aligned, so it is recalled that the even symbols are not probable big hits (normally big hits). . Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a non-probable symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the meter display displayed in the meter display area 90 and the final display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area 9F (step S8003). The final display mode indicates what display mode is finally displayed through a predetermined change or without a change.

  In step S8003, the CPU 101 for effect control performs lottery processing using the meter display final display mode determination table based on the variation pattern, and determines the final display mode of meter display.

  FIG. 42A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the meter display final display mode determination table. In the final display mode determination table, determination items (“no change”, “first stage”, “second stage”, “third stage”, “fourth stage”, and “fifth stage” for each variation pattern are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 42A in which determination values are assigned to each other, the ratio of assigned determination values is shown to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the final display mode of the meter display, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42A, the numerical value corresponding to the decision item for each variation pattern indicates the ratio (%) at which each decision item is selected.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the meter display final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42A, the special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42C and the meter display change effect mode determination shown in FIG. The table, the meter display change effect timing determination table shown in FIG. 44, and the like are also actually assigned determination values, but the ratio of the determination values assigned is shown to simplify the description. Also in steps S8006a and S8007, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the display change timing and determines that it matches the extracted random number, as in step S8003. Decide what the value is assigned to.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), in this embodiment, the meter display can be displayed in the display mode of the first to fifth stages in addition to the normal mode in which the meter value is not displayed. . For example, when the meter display final display mode is determined to be “no change”, the meter value on the meter display does not change. Further, when the final display mode of the meter display is determined as any one of “first stage” to “fifth stage”, the meter display is finally changed to the display mode of the first stage to the fifth stage. To do. In this example, the meter display is composed of five scales displayed in the meter display area 9F shown in FIG. And the meter display becomes an aspect in which the color of one scale among the five changes in the display mode of the first stage, and becomes an aspect in which the color of the two scales of the five changes in the display form of the second stage, In the display mode of the third stage, the color of the three scales out of the five is changed. In the display mode of the fourth stage, the color of the four scales of the five is changed, and the display mode of the fifth stage is displayed. Then, it becomes the aspect in which the color of the five whole scales changed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display changes when the meter display change effect is executed.

  What is characteristic in the meter display final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42A is that the variation pattern including the super reach is larger than the variation pattern not including the super reach, and the display result is larger than the deviation. Is that the determination value is set so that the ratio determined other than “no change” is higher. Furthermore, “second stage” than “first stage”, “third stage” than “second stage”, “fourth stage” than “third stage”, and “fourth stage” than “fourth stage”. That is, the determination value is set so that the ratio determined to “5 levels” is high. By having such a feature, when the display mode of the meter display is changed (that is, when the display mode of the meter display is not changed) (that is, when the display mode of the meter display is not changed), When the presentation is executed), the final display mode of the meter display is “second stage” than “first stage”, “third stage”, “third stage” than “second stage”. “4th stage” than “4th stage”, and “5th stage” than “4th stage” can increase the proportion of production patterns that are advantageous (for example, develop into super reach) Thus, the rate at which the display result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the final display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the meter display (that is, the execution of the meter display change effect), and the display mode is finally displayed in any display mode. You can get a lot of attention.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is configured to change according to the change of the meter display. Therefore, in step S8003, the final display mode of the active display is also determined by determining the final display mode of the meter display. Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display according to the change of the meter display is also referred to as the active display change effect.

  FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meter display / active display correspondence table. As shown in FIG. 42B, in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and The display can be changed to the “third mode (red)”. As shown in FIG. 42B, when the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be “first stage” or “second stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “first mode ( Blue) ”and the final display mode of meter display is determined as“ third stage ”or“ fourth stage ”, the final display mode of active display is determined as“ second mode (green) ”. When the final display mode of the meter display is determined as “fifth stage”, the final display mode of the active display is determined as “third mode (red)”. When the final display mode of meter display is determined as “no change”, the final display mode of active display is determined as the normal mode (white).

  As shown in FIG. 42B, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the meter display is changed to the first stage or the second stage, the active display is changed to the first mode (blue). Change production is performed. When the display mode of the meter display changes to the third stage or the fourth stage, an active display change effect is performed in which the display mode of the active display changes to the second mode (green). Further, when the display mode of the meter display changes to the fifth stage, an active display change effect is performed in which the display mode of the active display changes to the third mode (red). In addition, when the display mode of meter display does not change, the display mode of active display also remains the normal mode (white).

  If it is determined in step S8003 that the final display mode of the meter display is “no change” (N in step S8004), that is, if the meter display change effect (and the active display change effect) is not executed, the process proceeds to step S8008. To do. On the other hand, when the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be other than “no change” (Y in step S8004), that is, when the meter display change effect (and the active display change effect) is executed, the effect control CPU 101 Then, it is confirmed whether or not the final display mode of the meter display is “fifth stage” (step S8005). If the final display mode of the meter display is “fifth stage” (Y in step S8005), the effect control CPU 101 determines the display mode of the special display (step S8006a). On the other hand, when the final display mode of the meter display is not “fifth stage” (Y in step S8005), the process proceeds to step S8007.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed according to the change of the meter display. Further, when the meter display changes to the display mode of the fifth stage, the meter display and the active display are changed. It is configured to change the display to a special display. For example, in the effect display device 9, a special display (the special display 202 indicating the letter “V” in the example of FIG. 49F) is displayed at the position where the active display area 9F and the meter display area 90 were displayed. The With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the meter display has changed to the fifth stage (that is, the highest stage). In order to easily recognize that the meter display has changed to the fifth stage and that the display mode of the active display has changed to the third mode (red), the meter display is changed according to the display mode of the fifth stage for a predetermined period. It is desirable that the active display is displayed for a predetermined period in the third mode (red), and then the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display and displayed.

  In step S8006a, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using the special display mode determination table based on the variation pattern, and determines the display mode of the special display. When the display is changed to the special display, that is, when the decision item other than “no change to the special display” is determined in step S8006a (Y in step S8006b), the effect control CPU 101 switches to the special display. A special display flag indicating that the change is to be made is set (step S8006c).

  FIG. 42C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 42 (C), in this embodiment, the special display includes the first special display mode (“heat”), the second special display mode (“extreme heat”), and the third special display mode (“ V "). As shown in FIG. 42C, when the display mode of the special display is determined to be the first special display mode (“heat”), the special display indicating the characters “heat” is displayed and the second special display mode is displayed. When the display mode (“Intense heat”) is determined, a special display indicating the characters “Intense heat” is displayed. When the display mode is determined as the third special display mode (“V”), “V” A special display showing the characters "" is displayed.

  In the special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (C), what is characteristic is that when the display result is a big hit rather than a loss, the “second special display mode”, “ The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “third special display mode” is higher than the “second special display mode”. By providing such a feature, the display mode of the special display is “second special display mode” rather than “first special display mode”, and “third special display mode” than “second special display mode”. The ratio which becomes a big hit can be made higher. That is, the big hit expectation can be varied depending on the display mode of the special display. Therefore, attention can be paid to which display mode displays the special display.

  As shown in FIG. 42C, the “third special display mode” is configured to be determined only when the display result is a big hit. That is, when the special display of the third special display mode is displayed, the big hit is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to which display mode the special display is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 42C, in this embodiment, the display mode of the special display may be determined as “no change to the special display”. The meter display and the third mode active display are not changed to the special display. Also, the jackpot expectation degree is higher when determined to be other than “no change to special display” rather than “no change to special display”. With this configuration, when the meter display of the fifth stage and the active display of the third mode are displayed, attention can be paid to the change to the special display, and an expectation can be given. For example, when the meter display is changed to the fifth stage (the highest stage), the display may be changed to the special display.

  In this embodiment, the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be “fifth stage” only when the variation pattern includes super reach (see FIG. 42A). ), The special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (C) is configured to correspond only to the variation pattern including super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern does not include super reach, The final display mode of the meter display may be determined as “fifth stage”, and the special display may be displayed in any one of the display modes.

  In addition, the determination ratio is not limited to the configuration example such as the meter display final display mode determination table illustrated in FIG. 42A and the special display mode determination table illustrated in FIG. 42C, for example, depending on the jackpot type You may do it.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode and execution timing of the meter display change effect (step S8007).

  In step S8007, the CPU 101 for effect control performs lottery processing using the meter display change effect mode determination table based on the display result, and determines the effect mode of the meter display change effect. Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using the meter display change effect timing determination table based on the display result, and determines the execution timing of the meter display change effect.

  43A to 43E are explanatory diagrams showing a configuration example of the meter display change effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, one of the meter display change effect mode determination tables of FIGS. 43A to 43E is selected according to the final display mode of the meter display determined in step S8003.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (E), in this embodiment, the meter display change effect includes the first effect mode (character A appearance), the second effect mode (character B appearance), and the third effect mode. (Character C appears). When the effect mode of the meter display change effect is determined to be the first effect mode, the character A appears during the change display of the effect symbol, the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed, and the second effect When the mode is determined, the character B appears during the variation display of the effect design, the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed, and when the effect design is determined as the third effect mode, The character C appears during the variable display, and the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed.

  What is characteristic in the meter display change effect mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (E) is that the display result is a big hit rather than an outage, rather than the “first effect mode”. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode”. By providing such a feature, the display mode of the meter display change effect is “second effect mode” rather than “first effect mode” and “third effect mode” than “second effect mode”. However, it is possible to increase the rate at which the display result is a big hit. That is, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the production mode of the meter display change effect. Therefore, attention can be paid to which effect mode the meter display change effect is executed.

  Also, what is characteristic in the meter display change effect mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E is that the final display mode of meter display is “second stage”, “second stage” rather than “first stage”. The stage of the meter display change effect is “3rd stage”, “4th stage” than “3rd stage”, and “5th stage” than “4th stage”. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “second effect mode” and the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode”. That is, the meter display change effect is more “second effect mode” than “first effect mode”, and “third effect mode” is more “third effect mode” than the “first effect mode”. The degree of expectation of the display mode is high (the changing stage is large). By configuring in this way, attention can be paid to which effect mode the meter display change effect is executed in.

  In this embodiment, the meter display is always changed when the meter display change effect is executed. However, the meter display may not be changed even if it is executed. . In this case, for example, although the character appears, an effect of leaving the character without changing the meter display is performed. In this case, the rate at which the meter display changes may vary depending on the production mode. For example, in the case of the first effect mode, the meter display may change at a rate of 30%, and in the case of the third effect mode, the meter display may change at a rate of 70%.

  44A to 44E are explanatory diagrams illustrating a configuration example of the meter display change effect timing determination table. In this embodiment, one of the meter display change effect timing determination tables in FIGS. 44A to 44E is selected according to the final display mode of the meter display determined in step S8003.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (A) to 44 (E), in this embodiment, the meter display change effect is represented by a first timing (immediately after the start of fluctuation), a second timing (before reach establishment), and a third timing (reach establishment). It can be executed in (after). Note that the execution is not limited to the timing shown in this embodiment, and may be executed at any timing, such as for each pseudo-variation. Moreover, not only during the variable display but also during the big hit game. In this case, it may be suggested that the display mode of the meter display or the active display may indicate that the game state is controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a short-time state or a probable change state) after the big-hit game. Good.

  44A to 44E are characteristic in the meter display change effect timing determination table. When the display result is a big hit rather than a loss, the “second timing” is more than the “first timing”. That is, the determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “third timing” is higher than the “second timing”. By having such a feature, the display timing of the meter display change effect is “second timing” rather than “first timing” and “third timing” rather than “second timing”. The rate at which the result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the big hit expectation can be varied depending on the execution timing of the meter display change effect. Therefore, it can be noted at which timing the meter display change effect is executed.

  Also, what is characteristic in the meter display change effect timing determination table shown in FIGS. 44A to 44E is that the final display mode of meter display is “second stage”, “second stage” rather than “first stage”. The execution timing of the meter display change effect is “the third stage”, “the fourth stage” than “the third stage”, and “the fifth stage” than “the fourth stage”. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as “second timing” is higher than “1 timing” and “third timing” is higher than “second timing”. That is, when the execution timing of the meter display change effect is “second timing” rather than “first timing” and “third timing” rather than “second timing”, the expected display mode of the meter display after the change is expected. It is configured to increase the degree (the changing stage becomes larger). With this configuration as well, attention can be paid to at which execution timing the meter display change effect is executed. Note that when the meter display change effect is executed, the meter display may be changed at different rates depending on the execution timing when the meter display may not change. For example, the meter display may change at a rate of 30% in the case of the first timing, and the meter display may change at a rate of 70% in the case of the third timing.

  In this embodiment, each meter display change effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 and each meter display change effect timing determination table shown in FIG. 44 are determined according to the display result (out of place or big hit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be determined according to a variation pattern or a jackpot type.

  In this embodiment, the meter display change effect can be executed once during the change display of the effect symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the meter display change effect can be executed a plurality of times is also possible. By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the start of the change of the effect symbol (first timing), the first meter display change effect is executed, the meter display changes to the first stage, and the active display change effect is When the active display changes to the first mode and the reach is established (second timing), the second meter display change effect is executed, the meter display changes to the second stage, and the reach is established (third At the timing), the third meter display change effect is executed to change the meter display to the third stage, and the active display change effect is executed to change the active display to the second mode.

  In addition, when the meter display change effect can be executed a plurality of times, the effect mode may be different at each execution timing. For example, the first meter display change effect is executed in the first effect mode immediately after the start of the change of the effect symbol (first timing), and after the reach is established (third timing), the second meter display change effect is You may be made to perform by 2 production | presentation aspects.

  When the effect mode and execution timing of the meter display change effect are determined in step S8007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the content of the meter display change effect (step S8009). If it is determined in step S8004 that there is no change in meter display, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S8008). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8008 or step S8009 is started (step S8010).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to a change in the display screen (including active display) of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. If it is determined to execute an effect such as a meter display change effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect to be executed. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, since the control content of the effect device differs between when the meter display change effect is executed and when it is not executed, the corresponding process table is selected. Moreover, in this embodiment, a different process table is selected according to the production mode and execution timing of the meter display change effect.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8007). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8008).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 displays an active display in the active display area 9F (step S8009a). In this embodiment, the active display is displayed in the same manner as the first hold display or the second hold display. In addition, it is set as the structure which can perform the production | presentation which changes the display mode of a pending | holding display, and when the pending | holding display corresponding to the variable display to start is displayed by the display mode different from a normal mode, an active display is carried out by the display mode Is displayed. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8010).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and as a changing effect, for example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect feather role notice effect, a blackout effect, or the like is executed. It is possible to determine whether or not and perform a notice effect based on the determination result.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the timing immediately before the meter display change effect is started (step S8106). Whether or not it is the timing immediately before the meter display change effect is started can be confirmed by the contents of the process data. The timing immediately before the start of the meter display change effect is preferably such that a period for executing the notification effect described later can be secured before the meter display change effect is started.

  The display control for causing the character to appear in the display area of the effect display device 9 and changing the display mode of the meter display by the meter display change effect is realized by executing the process of step S8105.

  If it is the timing immediately before the start of the meter display change effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notification effect for notifying that the meter display change effect is started (step S8107). In this embodiment, an effect of blinking the meter display area 90 is executed as a notification effect (see FIG. 48B). In addition, it is not restricted to the example of this embodiment, The presence or absence of execution of a notification effect is determined by lottery, and a case where it is executed and a case where it is not executed may be provided. In addition, when the notification effect is executed and when the meter display change effect is executed without being executed, the degree of advantage (for example, the rate at which the meter display change effect is executed according to the effect mode having a high expectation degree, and the expectation degree) May be different from each other in the ratio of changing to a high display mode and the ratio of jackpot.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display mode of the active display corresponds to the display mode of the meter display (step S8108). If not, the display mode of the active display is displayed as the meter display. The display mode corresponding to the mode is changed (step S8109). That is, when the process of step S8105 is executed, the meter display change effect is performed, the display mode of the meter display changes, and the display mode of the active display no longer corresponds to FIG. 42B. Based on the contents of the meter display / active display correspondence table shown, an active display change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed. For example, when the display mode of the meter display is “third stage” and the display mode of the active display is the normal mode (white), the active display that changes the display mode of the active display to the second mode (green) Perform a change effect.

  In addition, in order to make it easy to understand that the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the display mode of the meter display, the change of the display mode of the meter display and the change of the display mode of the active display are performed simultaneously. Instead, the display mode of the active display may be changed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the meter display has changed.

  Next, when the display mode of the meter display is the fifth stage (Y in step S8110a) and the special display flag is set (step S8110b), the effect control CPU 101 performs special meter display and active display. Control to change the display to display is performed (step S8111). That is, when the process of step S8105 is executed, a meter display change effect is performed and the display mode of the meter display changes to the fifth stage, and the display mode of the active display is changed by executing the process of step S8109. If it is determined to change to the third mode and change to the special display, the meter display and the active display are erased, and the special display is displayed. In step S8111, the special display is displayed in any one of the first special display mode to the third special display mode determined in step S8006a of the effect symbol variation start process.

  In addition, in order to make it easy to understand that the special display is displayed in response to the display mode of the meter display being changed to the fifth stage and the display mode of the active display being changed to the third mode, the meter display and the active display The special display may be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the display mode of the display changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a period in which an expectation can be obtained by paying attention to whether or not the special display is displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the special display is displayed, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display by performing the control to delete the meter display and the active display. When displaying the display, it may be configured such that either the meter display or the active display is changed to a special display by performing control to delete either the meter display or the active display. Further, the special display may be additionally displayed without deleting the meter display and the active display.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8112), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8113).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8108 to S8109, the display mode of the active display is changed according to the change of the meter display. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the active display changes due to the meter display change effect, the change of the display mode of the active display can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest can be improved. it can.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect is executed immediately before the meter display change effect is started by executing the processes of steps S8106 to S8107. Therefore, attention can be paid to changes in the meter display.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the active display in the active display area 9F (step S8300). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if not, ends the processing. When the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b), and performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-order symbol, jackpot symbol). This is performed (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 39, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  Next, specific examples of the meter display change effect and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. In the example of FIG. 48, the meter display change effect is executed in the first effect mode, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first stage display mode, and the active display changes to the first mode according to the change in the meter display. A changing active display changing effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in the effect display device 9, when the effect symbol variation display is started, an active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 48A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48B, immediately before the meter display change effect is started, a notification effect that blinks and displays the meter display 90 is executed. Then, when the meter display change effect of the first effect mode is started, the character A 201a appears (FIG. 48C), and the display mode of the meter display is the first in which the color of one scale of the five changes. The display mode is changed to a stage display mode (FIG. 48D). Thereafter, according to the change in the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 48E, the color is indicated by characters) and displayed (FIG. 48 ( E)).

  In the example of FIG. 49, the meter display change effect is executed in the third effect mode, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the fifth level display mode, and the active display changes to the third mode according to the change in the meter display. In addition, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display in the third special display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the effect display device 9, when the effect symbol variation display is started, an active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 49A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49B, immediately before the meter display change effect is started, a notification effect that blinks and displays the meter display 90 is executed. Then, when the meter display change effect of the third effect mode is started, the character C201c appears (FIG. 49C), and the display mode of the meter display is the fifth in which the color of all scales of the five changes. The display mode is changed to a stage display mode (FIG. 49D). Further, according to the change of the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed and displayed in the third mode (in the example of FIG. 49E, the color is indicated by characters) (FIG. 49 ( E)).

  Then, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display in the third special display mode (special display 202 indicating the letter “V”) (FIG. 49F). Thereafter, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 49 (G)).

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed according to the change of the meter display. For example, the display mode of any one of the pending displays changes according to the change of the meter display. It may be configured to. In this case, it is realized by associating and executing the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the meter display change effect based on the command at the time of starting winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the time of starting winning, and the presentation is executed based on the determination result. Also, in the case where any of the display forms of the hold display changes in response to the meter display, the meter display change effect is produced during the period from when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display starts. May be executable.

  In addition, for example, when the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the pre-reading effect, and the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode is active according to the display mode. You may make it display a display. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). . In this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change in the meter display, and the active display that takes over the display mode of the hold display changes according to the further change in the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on a command at the time of start winning at the time of starting winning, or may be determined in the effect symbol variation start process. Also good. In this case, the meter display change effect may be executable during the period from when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific display means (for example, the active display area 9F or the first reserved memory) that can display the specific display (for example, active display or hold display) corresponding to the variable display. A display unit 9a, a second on-hold storage display unit 9b), and a state change display means (for example, a meter display region 90) capable of displaying a state change display (for example, meter display) that can be changed in stages. The display means can display the specific display by a plurality of types of display modes (for example, first to third modes) having different degrees of expectation, and according to the display stage of the state change display, The specific display is displayed by changing to any display mode (see the meter display / active display correspondence table shown in FIG. 42B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the change in the display mode of the specific display from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, the meter display 90 has been described as an example of the state change display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the state change display may be realized by an image simulating a measuring instrument such as a tachometer. The state change display may be realized by an arbitrary image such as a character, a clock, a graph, or a numerical display as long as it can be changed in a stepwise manner without being limited to an image imitating a measuring instrument.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is configured to include a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect when the display stage of the state change display changes. Therefore, attention can be paid to the state change display.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the specific display is displayed in the same display mode, the degree of expectation varies depending on the display stage of the state change display (for example, FIG. 42). (As shown in (A) and (B), even if the display mode of the active display is the same as that of the first mode, the expectation is higher when the meter display is in the second stage than in the first stage) . Therefore, in addition to the display mode of the specific display, attention can be paid to the display stage of the state change display. In addition, if the display stage of the state change display can be changed a plurality of times, it is expected that the display stage of the state change display will change even after the display mode of the specific display changes. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a meter display change effect) for changing the display stage of the state change display is provided, and the special effect execution means includes a plurality of types of effect modes ( For example, the special effect can be executed in any one of the first effect mode to the third effect mode), and the state change display is displayed depending on which effect mode is executed. The ratio of changing the stage is different (see the meter display change effect mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E). For this reason, it is possible to focus attention on the effect aspect of the special effect and improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, when the state change display changes to a specific stage (for example, the fifth stage), the state change display means changes the state change display to a specific mode (for example, special display) and displays it. It is configured. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the state change display has changed to a specific stage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the state change display means can display the state change display by a plurality of types of specific modes (for example, special displays of the first to third special display modes), , It is configured to include a specific mode (for example, a special display of the third special display mode) for notifying that it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Therefore, in addition to the state change display changing to a specific mode, attention can be paid to which one of a plurality of types of specific modes changes, and interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the active display is displayed in the same manner as the first hold display or the second hold display. You may make it display. For example, the active display is displayed in a mode in which the shape or part of the pattern is the same as the first hold display or the second hold display, and the color or size is different, or the shape or color is different from the first hold display or the second hold display. The active display may be displayed in the same manner but with different operations.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the second embodiment, a battle effect is executed as a super reach effect, and a jackpot expectation degree, a probable change expectation degree, etc. are suggested by executing the battle command effect in one of a plurality of modes at the start of the super reach effect. It is configured as follows. In addition, it is configured such that a display at the time of battle command to be displayed as a battle command effect (for example, a character “Win the battle!” Is displayed) and an active display are related to each other.

  For example, in the production symbol variation start process, if the variation pattern includes super reach, the display at the time of the battle command will be changed depending on the display result (loss or big hit) and the display mode of the active display at the start of the super reach production. The display may be determined according to the mode.

  FIG. 50 shows a configuration example of the battle command display color determination table. In the example shown in FIG. 50, the determination ratio of the display color at the time of the battle command differs depending on the display result and the display mode of the active display. Note that the display mode of the active display is the display mode when the reach effect in the super reach is started. In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display can be changed by executing the active display change effect after the effect symbol change display is started. Therefore, during the execution of the reach effect in super reach, the active display change effect is not executed and the display mode of the active display is set to be unchangeable, and the timing at which the reach effect in super reach is started is used as a reference. By determining the battle command time display color at a different ratio depending on the display mode of the active display, the player can easily recognize the relationship between the active display and the battle command time display color.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display result is “out of”, the display ratio at the time of the battle command is “blue”, regardless of the display mode of the active display, and “green”, “ The determination rate decreases in the order of “red”. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit”, regardless of the display mode of the active display, the display color at the time of the battle command has the highest determination ratio of “red”, “green”, “blue” The decision rate decreases in order. Therefore, when the display color at the time of the battle command is “red”, there is a higher possibility that the display result will be “big hit” than when the display color is other than “red” such as “green” or “blue”. In this way, the battle command is a suggestion effect that suggests that the display result is “big hit” at a different rate depending on the display color.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, even when the same display result is obtained, the ratio of selecting (determining) “red” as the display color at the time of the battle command may differ depending on the display mode of the active display. is there. For example, in the case where the display result is “out of”, when the display mode of the active display is “red”, the ratio of determining the display color at the time of the battle command to “red” is 1%. On the other hand, when the display result is “out of” and the display mode of the active display is “blue” or “green”, the display color at the time of the battle command is determined to be “red”. The percentage is 10%. Therefore, among the cases where the display result is “out of”, when the display mode of the active display is “red”, the display mode of the active display is “blue” or “green”. Thus, the ratio of selecting “red” as the display color at the time of the battle command becomes low.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display result is “big hit” and the display mode of the active display is “red”, the display mode of the active display is “blue” or “green”. Compared to the display mode, the ratio of selecting “red” as the display color at the time of the battle command is higher.

  In this embodiment, the display mode with the highest expectation in the active display is the third mode “red”. Further, the production mode having the highest expectation level in the battle command production which is the suggestion production is a case where the display color is “red”. And the selection ratio of the production | presentation aspect of a battle command is set so that it may differ according to whether an active display is a 3rd aspect "red" during execution of the reach production in super reach. If the display mode of the active display is the third mode “red”, when the display result is “out of”, the ratio that the display color at the time of the battle command is determined to be “red” (1%) ) Is lower than the ratio (10%) determined when the display mode is other than the third mode “red”, and the rate at which the display color at the time of the battle command is determined to be a display color other than “red” (for example, 69% of “blue”) is higher than the ratio determined when the display mode is other than the third mode “red” (for example, 60% of “blue”), whereas the display result is “big hit” The ratio (85%) at which the display color at the time of the battle command is determined to be “red” as the effect mode of the battle command is the rate determined when the display mode is other than the third mode “red” ( 70%) and the display color at the time of the battle command is set to a display color other than “red”. Is the percentage (e.g., 5% of the "blue") is is lower than the ratio which is determined when the third aspect "red" non-display mode (for example, 10% of the "blue").

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display result is “out of”, the ratio that the display color at the time of battle command is determined to be “green” is the same ratio (30%) regardless of the display mode of the active display. ). As described above, the display colors at the time of the battle command as the effect mode of the battle command may include a common selection ratio regardless of the display mode in which the active display is displayed.

  In this way, the game entertainment can be improved by providing relevance between the display at the time of the battle command displayed as the battle command effect and the display mode of the active display.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific effect means capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect) during the execution of the variable display, and the suggestion suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, a battle command effect) during execution of the specific effect is provided. The specific display means can display a corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the specific display. In addition, the suggestion effect means can execute the suggestion effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a battle command display displayed in blue, green, or red). And it is comprised so that the selection ratio of the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect may differ according to whether the corresponding | compatible display is displayed by the specific display mode during execution of a specific production | generation (the active display shown in FIG. 50 is different). (Refer to the case where “display color at battle command” becomes “red” when displayed in the third mode).

  In addition, about the structure shown in said each embodiment, only any one structure may be applied to a game machine, and it combines a part or all structure of said each embodiment. You may apply to a game machine.

  Note that the structure described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a game system called a so-called portable interlocking system. A gaming system called a mobile-linked system generally has a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined privilege for a player based on the predetermined information output by the gaming machine. A privilege granting device for performing the granting process.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine has a predetermined condition such as the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the so-called consecutive resort number (the number of jackpots during the probability variation state), the number of mission achievements, etc. It is stored as a history, and a two-dimensional code or the like is displayed as predetermined information at the end of the game. Further, the player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph the two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a Web server (privilege granting device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history. For example, as a predetermined privilege, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's mobile terminal, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's mobile terminal and the player next time When playing a game, the display screen of the gaming machine is processed so as to be customized according to the player's preference.

  When the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to the gaming system as described above, for example, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the display change effect is executed and the number of times is determined by the Web server. It may be managed as a game history. Then, according to the number of times that the display change effect is executed and the number of wins, the digital content can be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine can be customized.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game is based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not the game is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and shows a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning determination result. , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the pre-run announcement effect is executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Further, it may be configured such that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) is performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment disclosed herein and the embodiment described later are illustrative in all points and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and can display a pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started. It includes a hold display means, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, active display or hold display) corresponding to the variable display when variable display is started, and a predetermined area for displaying the specific display. A display means including a display means and a state change display means capable of displaying a state change display (for example, meter display) that can be changed in stages, and an effect (for example, an active change effect) executed in a predetermined area As the first specific display mode (for example, the mode in which the color of the active display changes) that changes the specific display based on predetermined information (for example, the character to be displayed), and the specific display A predetermined effect including a second specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the color of the active display does not change) can be executed, the specific display can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations, and the state changes There is a gaming machine that can display a specific display by changing to any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, first to third modes) according to the display stage of display. In an amusement machine, as an effect executed in the active display active display area, an effect of changing the active display based on a character or the like displayed in the effect can be executed, and a meter display change effect is executed. If it is possible to execute an active display change effect that changes the active display according to the step change from, the effect related to the display change of the active display can be varied, and the effect related to the display change of the active display becomes monotonous Can be further prevented, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

  Also, in one variable display, an effect that changes the active display based on the character, etc., and an active display change effect that changes the active display in response to a stepwise change from the normal mode in the meter display are simultaneously executed. Alternatively, one effect may be performed first, and the other effect may be executed after the end of one effect. Further, only one effect may be executed.

  Furthermore, in one variable display, an effect that changes the active display based on a character or the like, and an active display change effect that changes the active display in response to a stepwise change from the normal mode in the meter display, or simultaneously. In the case where it is executed, the degree of expectation for an advantageous state may be increased.

  Furthermore, as an effect (for example, an active change effect) executed in a predetermined area, a first specific display mode (for example, the color of the active display changes) that changes the specific display based on predetermined information (for example, a displayed character). And a second specific display mode that does not change the specific display (for example, a mode in which the color of the active display does not change). .

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, another example in the embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 51 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 51, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas on the image display device 905. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, it is synchronized with a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. Then, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derived”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is made when the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Generated based on a start winning by (for example, passing). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as the variable display being held (in this embodiment, it is a circle or the like, and is also referred to as a hold display symbol hereinafter). One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display held. The hold variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the left area in the start winning memory display area 905H. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the area on the right side in the start winning memory display area 905H.

  For example, by the occurrence of a first start winning in which a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a start condition (first start condition) for the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is established. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 51, together with the start winning memory display area 905H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED). Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a rectangular active display area 905HB, which is an area separated from other display areas, is arranged in the vicinity of the start winning storage display area 905H. In this embodiment, the display (background display) color of the active display area 905HB is different from other display areas. Further, an active display area 905HA is arranged inside the active display area 905HB. In the active display area 905HA, display corresponding to the variable display being executed is performed. The display in the active display area 905HA is referred to as “active display” (also referred to as “display corresponding to variable display”, “display during digestion”, or “current display”). In the active display area 905HA, for example, the first erased (digested) in the start winning memory display area 905H in response to the start of the special game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. An active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. Further, in the active display area 905HA, for example, in response to the start of the special game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, the active display area 905HA is erased (digested) in the start winning memory display area 905H. An active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed.

  A movable effect member 9060 is provided in the vicinity of a predetermined edge in the display area of the image display device 905 (here, in the vicinity of the right side). The movable effect member 9060 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 51 with the lower end portion as a fulcrum on the image display device 905 side by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG. A production model (production equipment device for production) that advances to the front of the display area is configured. That is, the movable effect member 9060 can be changed between a non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG.

  A normal winning ball device 906A is provided below the image display device 905, and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 906A. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. An ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B includes an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is normally opened when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning port, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 906B has a first variable state such as an open state or an expanded open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port, a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, or a difficult entry. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. If the value is equal to or less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  A game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by making the game ball enter the special winning prize opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 51, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 9031C that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 52) including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B (a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). 52) is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 shown in FIG. 52 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that a game medium has been passed or entered) from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 90100. The solenoid circuit 90111 uses a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid such as a signal for turning the solenoid 9081 or solenoid 9082 on or off) for a normal electric accessory. To the solenoid 9081 and the solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays all or part of the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, and the like. A control content for causing the electrical component for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as a section, and a function of controlling the determined control content.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012, a game effect lamp 909, a decoration LED, etc. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 52, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. The main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90100. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 905 in response to the variable symbol variable display (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there are fluctuation commands corresponding to the fluctuation patterns specified by the numbers. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90120 receives the command 80XX (H), the image display device 905 performs control so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize opening designation command) for notifying that when a game ball enters the first start prize opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning port designation command) for notifying that when a game ball enters the second starting winning port.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are effect control commands that indicate the contents of the determination result at the time of winning, and are effect control commands that indicate whether or not to win a big win as the determination result at the time of winning and the type of jackpot . The effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H). Command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) designates a loss. Command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R big hit and probability change. Command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) designates 15R big hit and uncertain change.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as “special symbol identification command” (or “design variation start designation command”).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect symbols and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (at the time of initial setting). Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (initial setting at the time of resumption). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise designates initialization. Send a command. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of fanfare (start of big hit gaming state) in the case of 15 rounds of big hit.

  In the big hit game state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the special big prize ball device 907 which is the big prize opening is opened (round game etc.) and the main big hit game is executed. The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect that informs or suggests that the jackpot game state has started, that is, that the jackpot game will start. The ending is an effect of notifying that the big hit game state has ended, that is, that the big hit game has ended.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big prize opening) that specifies opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates the closing of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the start of ending.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time-short (advantageous) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display is finished). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time-saving (advantageous) states.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total reserved memory number designation command) for designating a total reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of reserved memories. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of first special figure hold memory. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special figure holding memory number.

The command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the content of the determination result at the time of winning. As the determination result at the time of winning, the determination result (variation pattern) of which decision value range the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern type is in. This is a variation category command indicating the type determination result (each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, as with the variation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103 It comprises a random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 90100 only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, the random number circuit 90104 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102 indicates a predetermined random value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 90103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored. In the RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012, and the effect control CPU 90120 to the outside of the effect control board 9012 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting image data to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, A wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected. Further, the effect control board 9012 is also connected to wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 9016 for driving the movable effect member motor 9061 for operating the movable effect member 9060. .

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 52 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured. The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 905 and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 90123 in accordance with the determination. The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120, and generates image data. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. As an example, VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like may be mounted in the display control unit 90123. The VDP may be a microprocessor for image processing called a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  An I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013 (sound effect signal), or a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014 (Electric decoration signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 9016, and the like are output.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the sound control board 9013 to output sound, or turns on / off the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, etc. via the lamp control board 9014. Or display an effect image on the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123, or drive the movable effect member motor 9061 via the motor drive circuit 9016 to move the movable effect member 9060. . In this way, various effects (such as an effect for exciting the game, such as a reach effect, a movable effect member effect, and a message effect in which the image display device 905 displays a message image for the player, which will be described later), are executed. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. Thus, the first start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A starts based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B starts based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the normally open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 52, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9020 is established. Thereafter, the general symbol display device 9020 starts the general symbol game on the basis of the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, for example, that the previous general symbol game has ended, is established. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not to change the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol to “general symbol” as a predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display device 9020 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 905 In the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 905 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes a “big jackpot” (specific display result), which gives a value advantageous to the player. The big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is controlled. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is a lose symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is opened, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, the special winning opening is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the special winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when a big hit symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and a big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed. When it is made, the big hit type becomes “probability change”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is set to a first state (a big winning opening is open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round is executed in which the upper limit time to be set is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds). The big hit game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open big hit state or a first specific game state.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is set to a first state (a big winning opening is open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round is executed in which the upper limit time to be set is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds).

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. . Note that the probability change state is controlled to continue until one of the probability change end conditions is satisfied first, between a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next big hit gaming state being started. You may be made to do.

  As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a time reduction state and a probability change state.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state (in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening more easily than the normal state. Closed or normally open). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than in the normal state and the variable display result is “per normal figure”. By changing the length of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous manner by controlling the length of the ball to be longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Note that the time-short state in which the high opening control is performed is also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, and the like, and the game state that is not the time-short state is also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, or the like. The probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the like, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability state”, “low probability”, or the like. The gaming state when in the probable change state and the short time state is also referred to as “high-accuracy high base state”, “high-accuracy high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low probability high base state”, “low probability high base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The normal state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. Control, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), and the game is executed in a short time state. The upper limit number of possible variable displays becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is larger than the second probability (for example, 1/50). A high first probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”). More first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), such as part or all of it to be, may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. A period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In the (variable display period), the decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation design”). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” This is a display mode in which all or part of the combination is changed and changed in synchronization.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the decorative pattern fluctuating speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing different rendering operations from before reaching the reach mode May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In addition, the reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. before reaching the reach mode. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “hit reliability”, “expectation” or “hit expectation”) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. The reach effects of Super A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Hereinafter, the reach production of the super A to C will be referred to as “super reach A to C”, and the normal reach production may be referred to as “normal reach”.

  Super reach A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the super reach A to C, for example, the fighting characters may be different, and each of the super reach A to C may be set to a different production mode. In Super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result is “big hit”, and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result is “lost”. When the super reach C is executed, the super reach A may be executed after the super reach C is executed (there may be developed to the super reach A). When the super reach C is executed but the super reach A is not developed (for example, when a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is “lost”. On the other hand, when it develops to Super Reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins the battle), the variable display result may be a “hit”.

  Depending on which reach effect is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be “big hit” (in this embodiment, the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”). Expectation level of jackpot) changes. For example, the big hit expectation is higher when super reach A or B is executed than when normal reach is executed. In addition, among the super reach, when the super reach A (including the case of development from the super reach C) is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the super reach B is executed.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) (Probability that the effect is executed) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”. Same for degrees).

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. As an example, if the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the winning combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the non-probable big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols.

  When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variation big hit combination may be derived. The confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations are symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905, for example. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probabilistic big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905, for example, “ In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the same decorative symbol is changed again, and then the decorative symbol (probable variable symbol) that becomes a probable big hit combination is changed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach lose combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation pattern. Are included (see FIG. 56). The random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. The value can be any of "" to "65535". The random number MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Random number value that can be any one of “1” to “100”. The random number value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Any value of “251” can be taken.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed on the special symbol display device 904. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED), variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing, transmission settings for control commands (such as effect control commands) are set for each command in advance in the command transmission table (ROM 90101 for each effect control command to be transmitted). )) In the ROM 90101 is designated (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102), and the command control process is provided in the RAM 90102. Corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101) or the like, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control board 9012 After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command (the effect control command set to be transmitted) based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 90103 first determines the first start opening based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A. It is determined whether or not the switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number, which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), the start port which is a stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S90203).

  When the first start-up switch 9022A is OFF in step S9021 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), normal It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 906B ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S90206). If the second start port switch 9022B is not turned on (step S90204; No), or the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit (step S90205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90203 and S90206, the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 (incremented) when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. The second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 (incremented) when a game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S90208).

  After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, the random number circuit 90104 and random data provided by a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 90102, etc. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1 ′, the random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG.

  The first special figure holding storage unit shown in FIG. 57 (A) has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the first start winning has occurred, but has not yet started. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104, the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, and the like as reserved data. This is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach reach of super reach, etc.) It becomes reserved storage information.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 57 (B) is not yet started although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B and the second start winning has occurred. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is not stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104, the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, and the like as reserved data. The number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure (variable display) is held, and the variable display result (in this special figure game) It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach reach of super reach, etc.) This is reserved storage information.

  Following the processing of step S90210, the CPU 90103 performs start winning determination processing (step S90211). The start winning time determination process is a process for so-called prefetching. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols) are obtained by special symbol normal processing (step S90110 in FIG. 54, FIG. 9) described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S90111 in FIG. 54, FIG. 11), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed.

  On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 90103 executes the winning determination process in step S90211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , Judgment whether or not the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by the current start winning will be "big hit", and the variable display form of the decorative symbols executed by the current start winning is a display form with reach It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” or the decorative symbol variable display mode before the variable symbol special symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started. Based on this prediction result, the effect control CPU 90120 on the effect control board 9012 side changes the color of the hold display and the color of the active display (change) It is possible to determine whether or not to execute (production). In this embodiment, the initial color of the hold display and the active display is white, and can be changed to blue, green, and red by executing the change effect. The color has stages corresponding to the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the order is white, blue, green, and red from the bottom to the top. The execution period of the change effect is set so as to be within a single variable display period. Specifically, the game state is a short time (advantageous) state, or a state in which the variable display period is shortened (shortening variation) in response to the number of special figure hold memories (hold number) being a predetermined number or more. Even when the variable display period is shortened, the change effect execution period is set so as to be within the variable display period.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning time determination process. For example, the CPU 90103 first checks the state of a time reduction flag (a flag that is turned on in the time reduction state) or a probability change flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability change state) provided in a predetermined area in the RAM 90102. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is specified (step S90401). The CPU 90103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time reduction state when the time reduction flag is on, and is in the normal state when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. What is necessary is just to specify.

  Following the processing of step S90401, the CPU 90103 uses a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance. Select and set in the use table (step S90402). A plurality of special figure display result determination tables are prepared depending on whether the gaming state is a probable change state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 60A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. And “losing” may be assigned to the determination result.

  For example, as a special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 60A) corresponding to the non-probability change state and the probability change state is prepared. The CPU 90103 sets a table corresponding to the current gaming state from the table to the use table by reading the table from the ROM 90101 to the RAM 90102, for example.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S90209 of FIG. 55 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S90403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special chart display result of “big jackpot” in the use table set in the process of step S90402 are set, and the CPU 90103 sequentially sets the random value MR1 ′ and each decision value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 ′ by comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 90103 determines the random number MR1 ′ and the minimum or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 ′ is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 ′ is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 ′ is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) )it can.

  If it is determined in step S90403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S90403; No), the CPU 90103 displays a display result designation command (determination at the start winning prize) according to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A transmission setting for transmitting “losing” as a display result among the results) to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90405).

  If it is determined in step S90403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90403; Yes), the CPU 90103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 'for determining the jackpot type (step S90409). At this time, the CPU 90103 refers to a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type indicates the jackpot type as “non-probability change” and “probability change”. As long as it is assigned to the determination result. The CPU 90103 uses the jackpot type assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 'as the current determination result. A display result designation command (a command for designating “big hit” of “probability change” or “non-probability change” as the display result of the determination result at the time of starting winning) according to the determination result by the process of step S90409 is performed. Transmission settings for transmission to 9012 are performed (step S90410).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90405 and S410, the CPU 90103 transmits a variation category command (a command for designating a variation category in the determination result at the start winning prize) to the effect control board 9012. Is set (step S90413).

  After step S90413, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of a start winning prize designation command (step S90414). The first start winning opening designation command here is an effect control board 9012 as effect control information for notifying an increase in the number of first special figure hold memory when the first start condition is established by the occurrence of the first start winning. Sent to the other side. In addition, the second start winning opening designation command is the effect control information on the effect control board 9012 as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of second special figure hold memory when the second start condition is established by the occurrence of the second start prize. Sent to the side. After step S90414, the winning determination process ends.

  Returning again to FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S90212; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90214). The process proceeds to step S90204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 90103 performs steps S90110 to S90117 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 90102. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A, the first special symbol display unit 904A, the second special diagram reservation storage unit, the second special diagram reservation storage unit, and the like are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit”, the variable display result Is determined (predetermined) before is displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The data indicating the determination result of the big hit type is stored in the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102, whereby the big hit type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 54 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 59, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure holding memory number is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 may read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; No), for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 (step S90232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S90209 shown in FIG. 55 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9022, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Also, in the process of step S90233, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the start opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second start winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in association with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Following the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 60A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. And “losing” may be assigned according to the presence or absence of probability variation control in the probability variation state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state). The CPU 90103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state On the basis of the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ and whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state by referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the use table Thus, the determination result of either “big hit” or “losing” assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random value MR1 ′ may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 90103 determines that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102 is in the on state. do it. For example, when the random value MR1 ′ is “9000”, the CPU 90103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is on (when probability variation control is present), and the probability variation flag. When is in the off state (when there is no probability variation control), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (A), when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is “a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end processing in step S90117 shown in FIG. 54 (described in detail later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”, or the like. When the current state is the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be a “big hit” and the big hit gaming state than the case where the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. .

  Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S90240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90241). .

  Also, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, it is determined whether there are a plurality of jackpot types (“probability change” or “non-probability change”). What is necessary is just to be allocated to the result (refer FIG. 60 (B)). The CPU 90103 reads out the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the random number value for determining the big hit type Based on the numerical data indicating MR2 ′, the jackpot type assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR2 ′ may be selected by referring to the jackpot type decision table set in the use table. . For example, when the random value MR2 ′ is “75”, the CPU 90103 determines (selects) “probability variation” as the jackpot type.

  After executing the process of step S90242, the big hit type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 stores a big hit type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 60B) in a big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit). In the case of “probable change”, the value of “0” is stored, and in the case of “probability change”, the value is “1”).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S90240 (step S90240; No), or after executing the processing of steps S90241 to S90243, the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game. Is determined (step S90246). As an example, when it is determined in steps S90240 and S90244 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, according to the big hit type determination result in step S90242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value), a plurality of types of big hit Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S90247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S90247 and the next timer interruption occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S90111 shown in FIG. 54 is executed.

  In step S90235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S90235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S90248), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is effected from the main board 9011. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 9012 displays a demo screen when a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 of FIG. 54 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the fluctuation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90111 of FIG. 54 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S90261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S90262).

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S90261, the CPU 90103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the time when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S90265).

  FIG. 62 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach” that does not become the reach mode, and the reach mode is “ In response to each of the cases of “reach”, the variable display result (special display result) is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, etc. A variation pattern is prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, the variable display result is “losing” and “non-reach” is specified as the variation pattern. Fluctuation patterns PB1′-1 and PB1′-2 are prepared.

  Further, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the contents depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” (“big hit” in which the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”) or “losing”. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3'-1 ("big hit") that specify execution of normal reach are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2'-2 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3'-2 ("big hit") for specifying execution of super reach A are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2'-3 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 ("big hit") that designate execution of super reach B are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2'-4 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3'-4 ("big hit") are prepared which specify that super reach C is executed and then developed into super reach A.

  In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 61, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination is common in both cases where the jackpot type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. As long as it is assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern.

  The CPU 90103 is assigned to the determined value corresponding to the random value MR3 ′ by referring to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determining random value MR3 ′ read from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern thus determined may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random value MR3 ′ is “140”, the CPU 90103 selects the variation pattern PA3′-3.

  In the process of step S90265 shown in FIG. 61, a loss variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to a case where the gaming state is a normal state and a case where the gaming state is a short time state and a short time control is performed. A variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, whether the time is short or not is specified by whether or not a time-short flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short) provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102 is on. If the time reduction is not in progress (when the time reduction flag is OFF), the loss variation pattern is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, during the time reduction (when the time reduction flag is in the on state), the loss variation pattern is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  In each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination is assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern in accordance with the first special figure reserved storage number, A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern in accordance with the number of stored figures. Instead of assigning a numerical value to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern to the variation pattern determination result in accordance with the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number, the total reserved memory is used. Depending on the number, a numerical value to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The total reserved memory number may be specified from, for example, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter, the total value of the first reserved memory number count value and the second reserved memory number count value, or the like. .

  The CPU 90103 performs normal time and short time based on whether or not the time is short, based on the total pending storage count value and the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determining random number MR3 ′ read from the variation random number buffer. By referring to any of the loss variation pattern determination tables according to the above, when the total number of reserved memories is not short, “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8” ”Or“ 0 ”,“ 1 ”, or“ 2 ”to“ 8 ”when the time is short. The variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time.

  For example, when the time reduction flag is on and the random number value MR3 ′ is “229”, the CPU 90103 selects the variation pattern PA2′-1 when the total reserved memory count value is “0”, When the total reserved memory number count value is “1”, the variation pattern PB1′-1 is selected, and when the total reserved memory number count value is any of “3” to “8”, the variation pattern PB1′-2 is selected. .

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90262 and S90265 shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 90103 sets a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time (step S90266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 62, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 90103 can set a timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting a special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processing of steps S90262 and S90265.

  Following the processing of step S90266, the CPU 90103 performs a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. Among them, a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games in which the start condition is satisfied (step S90267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is performed. When starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold indicator 9025A to display the first special figure hold memory number decremented by 1 for the first time. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 9025A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold indicator 9025B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance display device 9025B (for example, reduce the lighting number of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S90267, command transmission setting is performed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (step S90268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends a first symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a first result to the effect control board 9012 from the main board 9011. Transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the reserved memory number designation command is performed. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends the second symbol variation start designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the second designation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the reserved memory number designation command is performed. The set command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command here are transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has decreased. Is done.

  After executing the process of step S90268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S90269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S90269, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S90112 shown in FIG. 54 is executed.

  The special symbol variation processing in step S90112 of FIG. 54 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process of varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, a process of measuring an elapsed time since the variation of the special symbol is started, and the like. It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B stops the special symbol variation, The fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S90110) that is the variable display result of the symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display), and the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the symbol is stopped (derived and displayed) The symbol determination designation command, which is an effect control command for notifying the event, is also set for transmission, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. The symbol setting designation command that is set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, when the above-described command control process is executed after the special symbol process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S90112, variable display of special symbols, derivation display of fixed special symbols, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 in FIG. 54 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process includes a process for determining whether or not the big hit flag is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are turned off, and a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting) Etc.), the count value of the short-time counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays executed during short-time control is set to “0”, corresponding to the start time of the big hit start stage (corresponding to the start of the big hit game state) Is a waiting time until the execution of the production is started, and is a predetermined time.) Is set, and the start of hitting to specify the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result is “big hit” Processing to set transmission of a designated command (production control command) and update the special figure process flag to “4” is included. The special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special figure process flag to “0” when the big hit flag is not in the on state.

  The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, when the above-described command control process is executed after the special symbol process process ends.

  Through a series of these processes, the time-saving state and the probability changing state are temporarily ended at the time of big hit, and the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction is reduced by “once” at the time of a loss. When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction becomes “0” times, the time reduction flag is turned off and the time reduction state is terminated. That is, the time reduction state (time reduction control) ends when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the following initial count value) before the variable display result becomes “big hit” from the start. Further, when the game state is changed, the changed game state is notified to the effect control board 9012 side.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 of FIG. 54 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the start timing of the round game (for example, that the big hit start performance waiting time set above has elapsed). ) And the like, the processing for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening, and the processing for starting the measurement of the elapsed time after the opening state is included. In this process, for example, corresponding to whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” (which can be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer), the big winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period may be set. As an example, the normal opening round is executed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened to “29 seconds” corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” for the big hit type. do it. When the process of setting the special winning opening to the open state is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeatedly performing step S90114, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time since the big winning opening is in an open state, a measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. For determining whether or not the time has come to return from the open state to the closed state (or may be in a partially open state), and the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball A process of returning the big prize opening to the closed state when it is determined that the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S90114) , Processing for starting measurement of the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeatedly performing step S90115, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or when the upper limit number has not been reached, Processing to measure the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended when the number of round games has reached the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S90114. A setting is made to transmit a jackpot end designation command, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, when the above-described command control process is executed after the special symbol process process ends. By repeatedly performing step S90116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  By repeatedly executing steps S90114 to S90116, the big hit gaming state is realized.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. After the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or when the upper limit number has not been reached, Processing to measure the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended when the number of round games has reached the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S90114. A setting is made to transmit a jackpot end designation command, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, when the above-described command control process is executed after the special symbol process process ends. By repeatedly performing step S90116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  The time-short state (time-short control) ends only when the next jackpot gaming state is started out of a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next jackpot gaming state being started. Also good. In this case, it is not necessary to set a count initial value or the time-saving count counter itself.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 9012. Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal serving as an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed, and numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by a random counter in the RAM 90122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 65, first, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a winning process (step S90160). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the effect process flag to “0” in accordance with the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122. Is variable display start waiting processing (step S90170), variable display start setting processing (step S90171) is “1”, variable display effect processing (step S90172) is “2”. , "3" is a waiting process per special figure (step S90173), "4" is a special winning opening normal opening process (step S90174), and "5" is an ending effect process. Any one of (Step S90175) is selected and executed.

  First, the winning process in step S90160 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of winning process executed in step S90160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, first, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted in the starting winning determination processing of FIG. 58 on the main board 9011 has been input (step S90600). ).

  Here, among the commands shown in FIG. 53, the command at the time of winning a prize is a start winning mouth designation command (one of the first starting prize opening designation command and the second starting prize opening designation command) and a display result designation command ( A display result 1 designation command, a display result 2 designation command, or a display result 3 designation command), and a variation category command. The effect control CPU 90120 can recognize the start prize by the start winning opening designation command, and the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the winning determination result corresponding to the start prize is a big hit by the display result designation command. Can be recognized. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can recognize a variable display variation pattern (whether it is super reach, etc.) corresponding to the start winning prize by the variation category command.

  If no winning command has been input (step S90600; No), the winning process ends. On the other hand, when a command at the time of winning is input (step S90600; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is a hold on which a color change pattern has already been set. It is determined whether there is information including color pattern information (step S90601).

  If there is no hold for which the color change pattern has already been set (step S90601; No), the effect control CPU 90120 is the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S90600. The color change pattern indicating the color change mode for the new hold is determined according to the hold order indicating the change and the change pattern indicated by the change category command determined to have been input in step S90600 (step S90602). .

  67 to 69 are diagrams illustrating an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the variation pattern. FIG. 67A shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern corresponding to the variation pattern when the holding order is 1. When the hold order is 1, a color in which the active display changes from white, which is the initial color, to blue, green, or red at the timing when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed The selection ratio between the change pattern (C1-1 to C1-3) and the case of no change is set. For example, the color change pattern C1-2 is a color change pattern in which the active display changes from white to green at the timing when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed.

  FIG. 67B shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern corresponding to the variation pattern when the holding order is 2. When the holding order is 2, at least one of the holding display at the timing when the holding order of the corresponding holding becomes 1 and the active display at the timing when the variable display about the corresponding holding is executed and the active display is performed. A selection ratio is set between a color change pattern (C2-1 to C2-9) in which the color changes to any of blue, green, and red and no change. For example, in the color change pattern C2-2, the hold display remains white at the timing when the corresponding hold order of the hold becomes 1, and the color change pattern C2-2 is active when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed. This is a color change pattern in which the display changes from white to green (becomes timing of color change).

  FIG. 68 shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the variation pattern when the holding order is 3. When the hold order is 3, the hold display at the timing when the corresponding hold order is 2, the hold display when the corresponding hold order is 1, and the variable display about the corresponding hold are executed. The color change pattern (C3-1 to C3-19) in which at least one of the active display at the timing when the active display is performed changes to blue, green, or red, and the case of no change are selected. A percentage is set. For example, in the color change pattern C3-8, the hold display remains white when the corresponding hold order becomes 2, and the hold display changes from white to green when the corresponding hold order becomes 1. In the color change pattern, the active display changes from green to red (the color change timing) when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed is there.

  FIG. 69 shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the variation pattern when the holding order is 4 or more. When the holding order is 4, the holding display at the timing when the corresponding holding order is 3, the holding display at the timing when the corresponding holding order is 2, and the corresponding holding order is 1. A color change pattern (C4) in which at least one of the hold display at the timing and the active display at the timing at which the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed changes to one of blue, green, and red -1 to C4-34) and a selection ratio between the case where the color is white as the initial color and no change is set. For example, in the color change pattern C4-18, the hold display remains white at the timing when the corresponding hold hold order becomes 3, and the hold display changes from white to green at the timing when the corresponding hold hold order becomes 2. Change (becomes color change timing), the hold display changes from green to red at the timing when the corresponding hold order is 1, and the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed. The color change pattern in which the active display remains red at the timing when the active display is performed.

  In addition, in the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the change pattern shown in FIGS. In other words, the variation category command determined to have been input in step S90600 is any one of the variation pattern of super reach big hit, the variation pattern of normal reach big hit, the variation pattern of super reach loss, the variation pattern of normal reach loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss. The selection ratio of the color change pattern differs depending on whether or not it exists.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the rate at which one of the color change patterns is selected, that is, the rate at which a change effect is executed and changed from white is higher than in the case of a loss. Also, in the case of big hits, comparing the ratio of remaining white, the ratio of finally blue, the ratio of finally green, and the ratio of finally red, The ratio remains white, finally becomes blue, finally becomes green, and finally becomes red. On the other hand, in the case of losing, when comparing the ratio of remaining white, the ratio of finally becoming blue, the ratio of finally becoming green, and the ratio of finally becoming red, It is the ratio that finally becomes red, the ratio that finally becomes green, the ratio that finally becomes blue, and the ratio that remains white. That is, the expectation of winning a big hit is highest when it finally becomes red, then it is highest when it finally becomes green, then it is high when it finally becomes blue, and it remains white Is the lowest. The information on the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 is stored in the RAM 90122, for example.

  In step S90602, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes a new hold order corresponding to the winning command determined to have been input in step S90600. For example, the RAM 90122 is set with a reserved memory number count value indicating the current special figure reserved memory number (hold number). The effect control CPU 90120 increments the value every time the first start winning port designation command or the second start winning port designation command is inputted, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is inputted. A process of decreasing by 1 is performed every time. Therefore, the reserved memory number count value indicates the current special figure reserved memory number, and what number is the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to have been input in step S90600 (holding order) Will be shown.

  After recognizing a new hold order corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S90600, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the color change patterns shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 according to the hold order. Select one of the selection ratios. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the selection ratio of the selected color change pattern, and the change category command determined to have been input in step S90600 is the change pattern for the super reach big hit, the change pattern for the normal reach big hit, the change pattern for the super reach lose. The color change pattern is determined according to whether the change pattern is a normal reach loss variation pattern or a non-reach loss variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is a color change by the determination in step S90602, in other words, whether or not a color change pattern other than no change is determined (step S90602a). When there is a color change (step S90602a; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the hold information including the color change pattern determined in step S90602 (step S90603). FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hold information. The hold information is stored in the RAM 90122, for example. As the hold information, for each hold storage (hold) corresponding to the start win, hold order information indicating the number of the hold corresponding to the start win from the oldest hold is set. Further, when the color change pattern is determined in step S90602, the effect control CPU 90120 adds the color change pattern information to the corresponding hold order information in step S90603.

  Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. When there is a hold for which a color change pattern has already been set (step S90601; Yes), or when there is no change in color (step S90602a; No), the effect control CPU 90120 holds hold information without a color change pattern, that is, The hold information including only the hold order information is set (step S90604).

  After the hold information including the color change pattern is set in step S90603 or after the hold information without the color change pattern is set in step S90604, the effect control CPU 90120 creates a new hold whose color is white. Display is performed (step S90605). Here, the effect control CPU 90120 gives a display control command for a new hold display whose color is white to the display control unit 90123 in accordance with the hold order indicated by the hold information newly set in step S90603 or step S90604. Is output. Based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120, the display control unit 90123 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, generates image data, and creates a new hold-display image whose color is white. The image is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Again, returning to FIG. After the winning process in step S90160, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90170 to S90175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 905 based on whether or not the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 905. In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90171 of FIG. 55 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 71, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” based on, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Determination is made (step S90521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S90521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011 changes the variable symbol display mode of the decorative pattern. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case of “non-reach” that is not the reach mode (step S90522).

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S90522; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination ( Step S90523). As an example, in the process of step S90523, first, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the left confirmed symbol updated by the effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122. The numerical data indicating the random number value for use is extracted, and the “left” of the display area of the image display device 905 in the display pattern of the image display device 905 is referred to by referring to the left determination symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121. The left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control may vary the probability of determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol as the pending change symbol depending on the reach state, the big hit, the game state such as the loss. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the medium-decorated decorative symbol as a pending change symbol with a probability of 50% in the case of super reach and lose, and the medium finalized ornament symbol with a probability of 70% in the case of super reach and a big hit. May be determined as a pending change symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine which variable display is to be used as the medium-decorated decorative symbol as the pending change symbol. For example, for each number of stored memories, a table is prepared for determining which variable display is to be used as a medium-decorated decorative symbol as a pending change symbol. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to a table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determines which of the variable display is to use the medium-decorated decorative symbol as the pending change symbol. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 4, when it is determined that the middle-decorated decorative symbol is to be a reserved change symbol, one variable display when the reserved memory is digested, two variable when the reserved memory is digested Display, variable display when three reserved memories are consumed, timing when one of the reserved memories is digested and variable display when two reserved memories are consumed, etc. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S90522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S90522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S90524). As an example, in the process of step S90524, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the left and right prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 are prepared. By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 are displayed. Determine the same decorative design. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the production random counter is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is prepared. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S90521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S90521; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination. (Step S90527). As an example, in the process of step S90527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted. Subsequently, a decorative symbol display area 905L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the display area of the image display device 905 is obtained by referring to a jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 905C and 905R is determined. At this time, for example, the same decorative design is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command or the like.

  For example, the RAM 90122 stores the information on the mode and stop order of the left determined decorative symbol, the right determined decorative symbol, and the middle determined decorative symbol set in Steps S90523, S90524, and S90527.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90523, S90524, and S90527, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a change effect setting process (step S90528).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step S90528 of FIG. First, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the color of the hold display changes in the current variation (variable display) (step S90700).

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a color change pattern is set in the hold information. When the color change pattern is set in the hold information, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hold order of the hold information in which the color change pattern is set is 2 or more. When the hold order of the hold information in which the color change pattern is set is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order and the color change indicated by the color change pattern. It is determined whether or not the timing matches. For example, when the hold order indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order is the hold order 1, and the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern is the hold order 1, the two match. The case where the hold information is set as shown in FIG. 70 will be described as an example. The hold order indicated by the hold rank obtained by subtracting 1 from the hold rank 4 of the hold information for which the color change pattern is set is the hold rank 3. The timing of the color change indicated by the color change pattern C4-33 is the timing of the holding orders 3 and 2, referring to FIG. For this reason, the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 6 from the hold order coincides with the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern.

  When the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order matches the timing of the color change indicated by the color change pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the color of the hold display in the current variation. If it does not match, it is determined that the color of the hold display does not change in the current variation.

  If the pending display color does not change in the current variation (step S90700; No), the effect control CPU 90120 then determines whether the active display color changes in the current variation (variable display) ( Step S90701).

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a color change pattern is set in the hold information. When the color change pattern is set in the hold information, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hold order of the hold information in which the color change pattern is set is 1. When the hold order of the hold information for which the color change pattern is set is 1, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the timing indicated by the hold order 0 obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order and the color change indicated by the color change pattern. It is determined whether or not the timing matches. For example, when the hold order indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order is the hold order 0, and the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern is the hold order 0 timing (active display timing), Both agree.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines that the timing indicated by the hold order 0 obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order and the timing of the color change indicated by the color change pattern are the timings of the hold order 0, and if this coincides, If it is determined that the color of the active display changes due to the fluctuation, and it does not match, it is determined that the color of the active display does not change due to the current fluctuation.

  When the color of the active display changes in this variation (step S90701; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 is executed inside the active display area 905HB when the color of the active display changes (when successful). An active first effect pattern for executing an active first effect that is an effect is determined (step S90702).

  The active first effect is an effect in which the active display is erased in the active display area 905HB, the character is displayed, and the active display is displayed again after the end. For example, three types of active first effect patterns, pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C, are prepared. The pattern A, the pattern B, and the pattern C are different in appearing characters, for example. Information about the active first effect pattern is stored in the RAM 90122, for example.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the determination ratio of the active first effect pattern with color change (during success) corresponds to a new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S90600. The pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C determination ratios differ depending on whether the variation category command that is input, that is, the variation category command determined to be input in step S90600 is a big hit or a loss. In the case of a big hit, the ratio determined for the pattern A is the highest, the ratio determined for the pattern B next is the highest, and the ratio determined for the pattern C is the lowest. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the ratio determined for the pattern C is the highest, the ratio determined for the pattern B is the next highest, and the ratio determined for the pattern A is the lowest. The effect control CPU 90120 determines the active first effect pattern with a color change (at the time of success) according to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the color of the active display does not change due to the current variation (step S90701; No), the effect control CPU 90120 inside the active display area 905HB when the color of the active display does not change (at the time of failure). Whether to execute the active first effect, which is an effect to be executed, is determined (step S90703). For example, the ratio of presence / absence of execution of the active first effect without color change (at the time of failure) is set as shown in FIG. In FIG. 74, the ratio with execution is small and the ratio without execution is large. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the active first effect without color change (at the time of failure) according to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not execution of the active first effect with no color change (at the time of failure) has been determined in step S90703 (step S90704).

  When it is determined that the active first effect without color change (when failure occurs) is executed (step S90704; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs active display when the color of the active display does not change (when failure occurs). An active first effect pattern for executing an active first effect that is an effect executed in the area 905HB is determined (step S90705).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 75, the determination ratio of the active first effect pattern without color change (when failure occurs) varies corresponding to the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S90600. Patterns, in other words, the determination ratios of patterns A, B, and C differ depending on whether the variation category command determined to have been input in step S90600 is a big hit or a loss. Also, the determination ratio of the active first effect pattern without color change (when failure) shown in FIG. 75 is different from the determination ratio of the active first effect pattern with color change (when success) shown in FIG. For example, the ratio determined for pattern A in the case of big hit is higher in the case of color change (when successful) than in the case of no color change (when failed), and is determined as pattern C in the case of big hit. The ratio is lower in the case of color change (when successful) shown in FIG. 73 than in the case of no color change (at the time of failure). The effect control CPU 90120 determines the active first effect pattern without color change (at the time of failure) according to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the active first effect without color change (when failure occurs) (step S90704; No), the effect control CPU 90120 is an active second effect that is an effect inside the active display area 905HB. Whether or not to execute is determined (step S90706).

  The active second effect is an effect in which the active display is erased inside the active display area 905HB, the character is displayed, and the active display is displayed again after the end. However, the active first effect described above is an effect in which the displayed character is different. For example, the ratio of the presence or absence of execution of the active second effect is set as shown in FIG. In FIG. 76, the ratio with execution is large and the ratio without execution is small. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the active second effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution of the active second effect is determined in step S90706 (step S90707).

  When execution of the active second effect is determined (step S90707; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs an active second effect pattern for executing the active second effect that is an effect in the active display area 905HB. Is determined (step S90708).

  For example, three types of active second effect patterns, pattern D, pattern E, and pattern F, are prepared. The pattern D, the pattern E, and the pattern F are different in appearing characters, for example. Information on the active second effect pattern is stored in the RAM 90122, for example.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, the determination ratio of the active second effect pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to a new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S90600, in other words, The determination ratios of the pattern D, the pattern E, and the pattern F are different depending on whether the variation category command determined to be input in step S90600 is a big hit or a loss. In the case of a big hit, the ratio determined for the pattern D is the highest, the ratio determined for the pattern E is the next highest, and the ratio determined for the pattern F is the lowest. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the ratio determined for the pattern F is the highest, the ratio determined for the pattern E is the next highest, and the ratio determined for the pattern D is the lowest. The effect control CPU 90120 determines the active second effect pattern according to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the color of the hold display changes in the current change (step S90700; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the hold change effect that is an effect for changing the color of the hold display in the current change. A pattern is determined (step S90720). For example, a plurality of pending change effect patterns are prepared, and the effect control CPU 90120 responds to whether it is a big hit or a loss, as in the case of determining the active first effect pattern and the active second effect pattern described above. Thus, any one of a plurality of pending change effect patterns can be determined at different determination rates. Information on the pending change effect pattern is stored in, for example, the RAM 90122.

  After determining the active first effect pattern with color change (when successful) in step S90702, after determining the active first effect pattern without color change (when failing) in step S90706, the active first effect pattern in step S90708 is determined. After the determination of the two effect patterns, after the determination of the hold change effect pattern in step S90720, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the hold information whose hold order is 1, and moves up the remaining hold information. (Step S90720). As a result, the hold ranks of 2 and higher are each incremented by one. Thereafter, the change effect setting process ends.

  Again, referring back to FIG. After the change effect setting processing in step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 performs other notice effect setting processing (step S90528a). The other notice effects are effects different from the active first effect, the active second effect, and the hold change effect described above, and are effects outside the active display area 905HB for indicating whether or not it is a big hit. This is a dialogue effect in which a character and the dialogue of the character are displayed. For example, in the case of a jackpot, the rate of execution is higher than in the case of a loss.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect pattern setting processing in accordance with the setting of various effects including the change effect setting process in step S90528 and the other notice effect setting process in step S90528a (step S90528a).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an effect control pattern to be used later, from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, based on the effect pattern set in step S90529 (step S90530).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 90122, corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern command, for example. (Step S90531).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 performs setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 (step S90532). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90531 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area.

  Furthermore, in response to the start of variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 performs settings for updating the hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H and the active display in the active display area 905HA (step S90533).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90534), and ends the variable display start setting process.

  Again, returning to FIG. The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 90122, and the effect control determined in step S90171. Various control data is read from the pattern, and a display control command is output to the display control unit 90123 based on the control data. The display control unit 90123 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120, generates image data, and the active first effect during the variable display of the decorative design. The image display device 905 displays images in various effects including the display of the active second effect, the hold change effect, and other notice effects.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when executing an active first effect and a serif effect, and FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when executing an active second effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 78A, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the active display area 905HB with a background display of a color different from the other display areas, and the start winning memory display area 905H has a white color. Display the hold display. When variable display is started in this state, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 in the active display area 905HA in the active display area 905HB. And move (shift) the remaining hold displays one by one. In this embodiment, the active display is larger than the hold display.

  Thereafter, when execution of the active first effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 78C, the effect control CPU 90120 changes to the active first effect pattern (here, the active first effect pattern A). Based on the active first effect, the line effect is executed. Thus, in the active display area 905HB, the active display in the active display area 905HA is erased, the character 905SA in the active first effect is displayed, and the character in the speech effect is displayed outside the active display region 905HB. 905T and line 905U are displayed.

  Thereafter, when there is a color change (success) in the active display, as shown in FIG. 78D, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the character 905SA and changes the color from white to another color (blue, green). , One of red) is displayed.

  On the other hand, when there is no color change (failure) in the active display, as shown in FIG. 78E, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the character 905SA, displays the active display again, and changes the color to white. Leave as it is.

  When the active display is displayed again with the color white, and when execution of the active second effect is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the active display, and the active second effect pattern. The active second effect based on (here, the active second effect pattern D) is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 79A, in the active display area 905HB, the active display in the active display area 905HA is erased, and the character 905SD in the active second effect is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 79B, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the character 905SD and displays the active display with the white color again.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the active display area 905HB separated from the other display areas is set, and the active display is displayed in the active display area 905HA within the active display area 905HB. Furthermore, as an effect executed in the active display area 905HB, an active first effect and an active second effect with different characters appearing can be executed, and when the color of the active display changes (when successful). When the active first effect based on the active first effect pattern can be executed and the color of the active display does not change (when failure occurs), the active first effect based on the active first effect pattern or the active first effect An active second effect based on the two effect patterns can be executed.

  In order to emphasize the active display, it is conceivable to enlarge the display area of the active display. However, when the display area of the active display is enlarged, there is a possibility that the display in other notice effects will be hindered and the game entertainment will be lowered. On the other hand, in this embodiment, an active display area 905HB that is separated from other display areas is set, and the active first color in which the color of the active display changes in the active display area 905HB. An active first effect or an active second effect in an aspect where the effect and the color of the active display do not change can be executed. For this reason, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while emphasizing the active display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the active first effect has three modes based on the active first effect patterns A, B, and C with different characters appearing. For this reason, the aspect of an active 1st production becomes various and a game entertainment interest improves.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the background display color of the active display area 905HB is different from that of other display areas. For this reason, the player can easily recognize the active display area 905HB, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the active display is larger than the hold display, and the active display is more conspicuous than the hold display. For this reason, the player can easily recognize the active display, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  According to this embodiment, when the active first effect or the active second effect is executed, the character is displayed after the active display is erased, and then the active display is displayed again. Since the active display area 905HB is small, the player recognizes that the active first effect and the active second effect are being executed by displaying the character after the active display is erased. It becomes easy.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the active first effect has three modes based on the different active first effect patterns A, B, and C of the characters that appear, and the order of the active first effect patterns A, B, and C In the active first effect, the rate at which the color of the active display changes is high. For this reason, the aspect of the active 1st production from a viewpoint of the change of the color of active display becomes various, and a game entertainment interest improves.

  According to this embodiment, when the color of the active display changes, the active first effect based on any one of the active first effect patterns A, B, and C is always executed. On the other hand, if the color of the active display does not change, whether or not to execute the active first effect is determined. If executed, the active first effect based on one of the active first effect patterns A, B, and C is determined. Is executed. Further, when the active first effect is not executed, it is determined whether or not the active second effect is executed. When the active second effect is executed, the active second effect based on one of the active second effect patterns D, E, and F is determined. Is executed. Thereby, the aspect of the effect performed within the active display area 905HB becomes various, and the game entertainment is improved.

  Also, according to this embodiment, as an effect different from the active first effect and the active second effect, a character that is an effect outside the active display area 905HB for suggesting whether or not it is a big hit, It is possible to execute a line effect in which the line of the character is displayed. The serif effect can be executed in parallel with the active first effect and the active second effect. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the execution period is overlapped with all or part of the line effect, the active first effect, and the active second effect. As described above, when the line effect is executed outside the active display area 905HB, the effect to be executed becomes various, and the game entertainment is improved.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various change and application are possible.

  For example, the above-described active first effect completed within the active display area 905HB and an effect (outside area) in which a predetermined action is generated from the outside of the active display area 905HB toward the active display within the active display area 905HB. Production) may be selectively executed. In this case, you may make it change the ratio in which the color of an active display changes in the case where an active 1st effect is performed, and the case where an outside area effect is performed. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control makes the execution ratio of the active first effect higher than the execution rate of the effect outside the area when the color of the active display changes, and activates when the color of the active display does not change. The execution ratio of the first effect is set lower than the execution ratio of the out-of-region effect.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when an out-of-region effect is executed. First, as shown in FIG. 80A, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the active display area 905HB with a background display of a color different from the other display areas, and the start winning memory display area 905H has a white color. Display the hold display. When variable display is started in this state, as shown in FIG. 80B, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 in the active display area 905HA in the active display area 905HB. And move (shift) the remaining hold displays one by one.

  Thereafter, when execution of the out-of-region effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 80C, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the airplane 905V that launches the missile toward the active display.

  Thereafter, when there is a color change (success) in the active display, as shown in FIG. 78D, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the character 905SA and changes the color from white to another color (blue, green). , One of red) is displayed.

  On the other hand, when there is no color change (failure) in the active display, as shown in FIG. 78E, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the character 905SA, displays the active display again, and changes the color to white. Leave as it is.

  As described above, by selectively executing the active first effect and the out-of-region effect, the player is caused to pay attention to whether the active first effect or the out-of-region effect is executed. Can improve the game entertainment.

  Moreover, you may make it the execution ratio of an active 1st production differ according to the display mode of active display. For example, when the color of the active display changes, there are cases where the active first effect is executed or not executed. When the color of the active display changes to red, the effect controlling CPU 90120 The execution ratio of the active first effect based on the active first effect patterns A, B, and C is made higher than the case where the color changes. Thereby, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the active first effect is executed, and the gaming interest is improved.

  In this embodiment, the active display is set to be larger than the hold display so that the active display is conspicuous (a mode in which recognition is easy). For example, the hold display is round and the active display is a star. You can make the active display stand out by making it different, like a shape, or you can make the active display different by making the hold display a white color and the active display a color other than white. You may make it stand out. Further, the active display may be made conspicuous by the difference in operation, such as a mode in which the hold display is stationary and an active display is an operation, a hold display is a shaking operation, and an active display is a rotation operation.

  In addition, when the hold display is moved (shifted) to the active display, or when the hold display is moved (shifted) one by one, the display mode may not be the same before and after the shift. An aspect with a similar shape, color, etc. may be used.

  Further, the change in the active display mode is not limited to the color change, and may be a change in size, shape, operation, or the like.

  In this embodiment, when there is a color change (success) in the active display, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 905SA after erasing the active display in the active display area 905HB, and further, the character 905SA. Is deleted, and the active display of the color after the change is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the character 905SA is deleted, the effect control CPU 90120 may display the color active display before the change again, and then display the color active display after the change.

  In this embodiment, if there is a hold for which a color change pattern has already been set in step S90601, the determination of the color change pattern indicating the color change mode for the new hold in step S90602 is executed. However, even if there is a hold for which a color change pattern has already been set, determination of a color change pattern indicating a color change mode for a new hold may be executed. That is, for a plurality of holds, the colors of the hold display and active display may be changed simultaneously.

  Further, when the colors of the hold display and the active display change simultaneously for a plurality of holds, when the color of the active display changes (at the time of success) in step S90702, it is executed inside the active display area 905HB. Both the process of determining the active first effect pattern for executing the active first effect that is the effect to be performed and the determination of the hold change effect pattern in step S90720 may be executed.

  In this embodiment, in step S90605, the hold display color for the new hold is white, but the hold display is displayed in a color other than white from the first stage of the hold display, and then another color is displayed. It may be possible to change it.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is an effect other than the active first effect and the active second effect, and the line effect can be executed as an effect outside the active display area 905HB. However, in the active display area 905HB, Any other effects such as a step-up notice effect, which is a multi-stage notice effect, may be executed.

  In this embodiment, when the active first effect and the active second effect are executed, the active display is erased and the character is displayed inside the active display area 905HB. However, it is not limited to erasure, and it is only necessary that the player cannot visually recognize the active display. For example, the player may not be able to visually recognize the active display by overwriting (superimposing) images displayed in the active first effect and the active second effect on the active display.

  In this embodiment, when the active first effect and the active second effect are executed, the deleted active display is displayed again after the end. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the deleted active display may be displayed again during the active first effect and the active second effect. For example, the active display may be displayed again by the effect of moving the active display from the outside to the inside of the active display area 905HB. Further, when the character displayed after erasing the active display is the character A ′, the active display is displayed again in the middle of the active first effect and the active second effect. The active display can be displayed again both during and after the execution of the active first effect and the active second effect, such as displaying the active display again after the end of the first effect and the active second effect. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the color of the hold display and the active display has a stage corresponding to the big hit expectation, and it is assumed that white, blue, green, and red are in order from the lower order to the upper order. In addition, there may be a color or display with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For example, a color or display with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than red may appear only in the case of a jackpot.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution period of the change effect is set so as to be within a single variable display period, and the game state is in a short time (advantageous) state or a shortened variation state, and the variable display is performed once. Even if the period of time is shortened, the execution period of the change effect is set so as to be within the period of one variable display. There is a change effect that fits in the variable display period and a change effect that fits in the variable display period in the normal state other than the shortened variation. If the change effect that fits in the variable display period in the state is selected and executed, and the game state is in a normal state other than the shortening variation, the change effect that fits in the variable display period in the normal state other than the shortening variation is selected. , It may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the color change pattern is different depending on the case of super reach big hit, normal reach big hit, super reach lose, normal reach lose, or non-reach lose, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection ratio of the color change pattern may be varied depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  In addition, a sound may be generated when an aspect such as a color of a hold display or an active display changes due to a change effect. Furthermore, you may make it a sound differ according to the color after changing. For example, different sounds may be produced depending on whether the color changes to red or blue. Furthermore, in the hold display and the active display, when changing to the same color, a common sound may be emitted. For example, a common sound may be emitted when the hold display changes to blue and when the active display changes to blue.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 'for determining the big hit type. However, the condition for determining the big hit type is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the big prize opening, and the type of jackpot may be determined based on a game ball entering (passing) the specific area. . For example, when the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit are provided, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

  Further, in this embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the big hit symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or inside the second start prize opening, and the game state is controlled based on the fact that a game ball enters (passes) the specific area. You may stay.

  In this embodiment, a mode in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers or symbols of 0 to 9 are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and among the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results May be included. In addition, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbols may be used. As variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (turning on / off alternately may be repeated). That is, the repeated display of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed last (lit), or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, normal symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  For example, in the above, the “ratio” is not limited to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, but A: B = 100%: 0% It is a concept that also includes a relationship (that is, a concept that includes an allocation in which one is 100% and the other is 0%). Further, when A is higher in proportion than B, it is a concept including a case where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and a case where B is 0% and A is larger than 0%. is there.

  Further, for example, in this embodiment, one change is made when the change is started in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuity. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc., before reaching reach (so-called if reach is not reached). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the effect control in the change display may be performed based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific change mode to be executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and encloses gaming media and scores based on the occurrence of winnings. The invention can also be applied to the enclosed game machine to be given.

  Further, only one type of off-line symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display is performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Also good. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  Further, in this embodiment, the prefetch determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side, but the command indicating the random number value is transmitted from the main side and the prefetch determination is performed on the sub side. You may make it do.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state, only determining the pattern (the mode of the round game). The gaming state after the big hit gaming state may be changed to the “probability changing state”.

  In addition, for example, a game score for use in a game is given and given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area using the gaming score or the gaming score given by winning the game.

  In the above description, the game machine is a game machine that uses a game medium. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game medium such as a game ball. It is also possible to apply to a sealed game machine that gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 9a 1st reserved memory display part 9b 2nd reserved memory display part 9F Active display area 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start Winning mouth 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Gaming machine frame 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Main effect lamp 9011 Board 9012 Production control board 9013 Sound control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Start-up switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 9031C Operation knob 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit 90125 I / O

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet started;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display when starting the variable display;
Display means including a predetermined area for displaying the specific display;
State change display means capable of displaying a state change display that can be changed stepwise;
With
As the effect executed in the predetermined area, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect including a first specific display mode that changes the specific display based on predetermined information and a second specific display mode that does not change the specific display,
The specific display can be displayed by a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations.
A gaming machine, wherein the specific display can be displayed by changing to any one of a plurality of display modes according to the display stage of the state change display.